WHAT  A  SOLDIER  SHOULD  KNOW 


WHAT  A  SOLDIER 
SHOULD  KNOW 

THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 


BY 
MAJOR  F.  C.  BOLLES 

3rd  Infantry,  U.  S,  Army 

CAPTAIN  E.  C.  JONES 

Medical  Dept,  U,  S.  Army 
AND 

CAPTAIN  J.  S.  UPHAM 

3rd  Infantry,  U,  S.  Army 


WITH  AN  INTRODUCTION  BY 

MAJOR-GENERAL  HUGH  L.  SCOTT 

Chief  of  Staff  of  the  U.  S.  Army 


ILliUSTilATED 


Garden  City  New  York 

DOUBLEDAY,  PAGE  &  COMPANY 

1917 


3 


e? 


Copyright,  1915,  by 

F.  C.  BoLLEs,  E.  C.  Jones, 

AND  J.  S.  Upham 

Copyright,  1916,  hy 
DOUBLEDAY,  PaGE  &  CoMPANY 

All  rights  reserved,  including  that  of 

translation  into  foreign  languages, 

including  the  Scandinavian 


Contents 


PACt 


Introduction ix 

CHAPTER 

I.    Rifle  AND  Equipment     . 3 

II.    Infantry  Drill  Regulations 27 

III.  Signaling 59 

IV.  Rules  of  Land  Warfare 67 

V.  Army  Regulations  and  Discipline    ....  73 

VI.    Discipline  and  Saluting 85 

VII.    Bayonet  Combat 89 

VIII.    History  of  the  United  States 94 

IX.    FmiNj  Regulations 102 

X.    First  Aid  TO  Wounds 128 

XL  Camp  Sanitation  and  Personal  Hygiene    .     .  146 

XIL    Venereal  Disease 159 

XIIL    Guard  Manual 165 

Index 175 


370934 


List  of  Half-Tone  Illustrations 

FAaNG   PAGE 

Artificial  Respiration 

Position  of  operator  (picture  No.  20) 142 

Position  of  patient  (picture  No.  21,  22,  23) 140 

Bloodvessels 

Arm  (picture  No.  2) 130 

Body  (picture  No.  1) 128 

Leg  (picture  No.  8) 132 

Drowning 

Removing  water  from  lungs  (picture  No.  19) 138 

Removing  person  from  water  (picture  No.  26) 140 

Position  for  giving  first  aid  (20,  21,  22,  23) 142, 140 

First  Aid  Packet 

Application  of  (picture  No.  13) 136 

Contents  of  (picture  No.  12) 134 

Improper  application  of  (picture  No.  14) 136 

Fractures,  Splints  and  Slings  for 

Arm  (picture  No.  15) 136 

Forearm  (picture  No.  16)         136 

Leg  (picture  No.  17) 138 

Thigh  (picture  No.  18) 138 

Hemorrhage,  Arterial 
Places  to  make  pressure 

Arm  (picture  No.  2) 130 

Arm  pit  (picture  No.  11) 134 

Forearm  (picture  No.  2,  7) 130 

Foot  (picture  No.  8,  9) 132, 134 

Hand  (picture  No.  2,  7) 130 

Head  (picture  No.  5) 132 

Leg  ^picture  No.  8,  9)         132, 134 

Neck  (picture  No.  10) 134 

Thigh  (picture  No.  8) 132 

Venous  (picture  No.  3) 132 

Infantry  Equipment,  Model  1910 18 

Ingrowing  Nails 

Proper  trimming  of  (picture  No.  24) 142 

Improper  trimming  of  (picture  No.  25)         142 

Slings  (See  fractures) 

Splints  (See  fractures) 

Tourniquets 

Application  of  (picture  No.  6,  8) 130, 132 

Composition  of  (picture  No.  2) 130 

vii 


Introduction 

By  Major-General  Hugh  L.  Scott,  U.  S.  A. 

The  conditions  under  which  modem  wars  are  fought  are 
ever  making  increasing  demands  on  the  individual  soldier.  The 
size  of  armies  has  increased  beyond  all  previous  conception; 
methods  of  leadership  have  been  perfected  but  due  to  the  in- 
creased difficulties  in  the  control  of  men  in  fire  swept  areas, 
this  leadership  must  be  carried  so  far  as  to  be  almost  automatic 
after  the  intention  of  the  leader  has  been  announced,  or  until 
a  new  order  is  signalled.  The  individual  soldier  must  know  how 
to  interpret  accurately  orders  and  signals,  for  the  enemy's  fire 
may  often  so  isolate  him  from  his  leader  and  comrades,  perhaps 
only  a  step  away,  that  he  may  be  thrown  on  his  own  initiative 
in  making  his  actions  conform  to  those  of  the  whole  line;  he  may 
have  to  use  his  own  judgment  in  opening  fire,  in  advancing,  in 
intrenching;  he  may  have  to  prepare  his  own  food,  to  dress 
his  own  wound  unaided,  or  assist  a  wounded  comrade. 

The  officer  must  be  well  trained  to  prepare  his  command  for 
such  a  test.  In  doing  so  he  trains  individual  soldiers  and  finally 
moulds  them  into  an  organization,  which  he  handles  as  a  unit 
or  as  a  combination  of  units. 

This  training  of  the  individual,  if  complete,  means  the  develop- 
ment of  discipline  and  character  as  well  as  the  physical  develop- 
ment of  the  soldier,  training  in  the  care  and  effective  use  of  the 
weapons  issued,  individual  sanitation,  and  the  ability  to  care 
for  one's  self  in  camp,  in  the  field,  and  in  the  trenches. 

Are  we  willing  to  place  our  sons  in  such  a  position  untrained, 
undisciplined,  ignorant  of  how  to  advance  under  fire,  how  to 
use  cover,  how  to  properly  use  their  arms,  how  to  intrench  when 
further  advance  has  been  halted,  how  to  stem  the  flow  of  blood 
from  a  wound  which  a  trained  soldier  might  have  avoided? 
What  government  wishes  to  force  its  untrained  youth  forward 
to  such  a  sacrifice?  A  nation  which  plans  to  combat  disciplined 
troops  with  raw  or  partially  trained  levies,  must  send  forward 


X  INTRODUCTION; 

an  army  at  least  twice  that  of  the  enemy;  must  stand  ready  to 
give  Uberally  from  its  manhood  to  replace  frightful  losses,  and 
even  then  have  no  guarantee  of  success. 

It  is  the  fundamental  duty  of  the  state  to  provide  for  its  de- 
fense; to  have  sufficient  trained  men  available  for  the  purpose 
because  it  is  no  less  than  murder  for  a  nation  to  permit  its  youth 
untrained  to  war  in  the  modem  sense  to  enter  battle  to-day. 

It  is  likewise  the  duty  of  every  citizen  to  fit  himself  by  means 
of  the  opportunities  which  the  government  should  offer,  and  so 
be  able  to  render  eflficient  service  to  the  state  as  a  trained  soldier 
in  the  event  of  need.  For  this  purpose  ''The  Soldier's  Cate- 
chism" should  be  an  efficient  help. 

H.  L.  Scott, 
Major-General, 
Chief  of  Staff. 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Staff, 
Washington,  D.  C, 
May  22,  1916o 


Note 

An  attempt  has  been  made  to  formulate  these  questions  and 
answers  in  as  simple  language  as  possible  in  order  that  the  aver- 
age soldier  msLj  readily  understand  them;  no  attempt  has  been 
made  to  follow  strict  grammatical  or  technical  rules  if  the  idea 
could  be  conveyed  in  a  simpler  form.  These  questions  are  not 
intended  to  supersede  instruction  by  the  company  commander 
on  the  subjects  covered,  but  are  intended  to  be  used  as  an  aid 
to  the  enlisted  man  in  obtaining  a  better  understanding  of  the 
subject  when  taken  up  by  his  instructors. 

The  Compilers 


WHAT  A  SOLDIER  SHOULD  KNOW 


CHAPTER  I 
RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT 

1.  Q.  From  what  articles  issued  to  you  for  field  service  should 

you  never  become  separated? 
A.  (a)  Rifle  and  bayonet. 

(b)  Ammunition. 

(c)  Intrenching  tool. 

(d)  Pack  and  cartridge  belt. 

2.  Q.  What  articles  constitute  your  field  kit? 
A. 


1  Bayonet  and  scabbard     1  Shelter  half  and  rope 

1  Brush  and  thong 

5  Shelter  ten  pins 

1  Front  sight  cover 

1  Poncho  (slicker  for  mounted 

1  Rifle,  U.  S.,  Cal.  30 

men) 

1  Bacon  can 

1  Blanket 

1  Condiment  c^Ji 

1  Drawers 

1  Canteen 

1  Cake  of  soap 

1  Canteen  cover 

1  Tooth  brush 

1  Cartridge  belt,  Cal. 

30     1  Comb 

1  Cup 

2  Pr.  socks,  light  wool 

1  First  aid  package 

1  Soap 

1  Fork 

1  Towel 

1  Gun  sling 

1  Identification  tag  and 

1  Knife 

tape 

1  Haversack 

1  Intrenching  tool 

1  Pack  carrier 

1  Undershirt 

1  Pouch  for  first  aid 

1  housewife  (for  one  man  erf 

package 

each  squad) 

1  Meat  can 

Ammunition  and    rations  if 

1  Spoon 

issued. 

What  is  carried  in  the 

surplus  kit? 

1  breeches 

1  drawers 

1  shirt,  olive  drab 

1  shoes,  russet,  marching 

2  pr.  socks.             * 

1  pr.  shoe  laces 

1  imdershirt 

RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  5 

4.  Q.  How  should  you  pack  your  bundle  which  is  to  go  into 
the  squad  surplus  kit  bag? 
A.  Socks  to  be  rolled  tightly,  one  pair  in  toe  of  each  shoe, 
shoes  placed  together,  heels  at  opposite  ends,  soles  out- 
ward, wrapped  tightly  in  underwear,  and  bundle  se- 
curely tied  around  the  middle  by  the  extra  pair  of  shoe 
laces — each  bundle  to  be  tagged  with  the  company  num- 
ber of  the  owner.  Breeches  and  olive  drab  shirts  to  be 
neatly  folded  and  packed  on  the  top  and  sides  of  the 
layers  of  bundles  when  placed  in  surplus  kit  bags. 

Rifle  and  Bayonet 

6.  Q.  What  is  the  name  and  caliber  of  your  rifle? 
A.  U.  S.  Magazine  rifle,  caliber  30. 

6.  Q.  What  is  the  number  of  your  rifle? 
A.  Number  " ." 

7.  Q.  Where  do  you  find  the  number  of  your  rifle? 
A.  On  the  right  side  of  front  end  of  receiver. 

8.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  caliber? 

A.  The  distance  across  the  bore  measured  between  the 
lands.    In  this  rifle,  thirty  hundredths  of  an  inch. 

9.  Q.  Point  out  the  following  parts  on  Pages  4,  6  and  8  and 

explain  their  use: 

Q.  Stock? 

A.  Fig.  1.  The  metallic  parts  of  the  gun  are  mounted  on 
the  stock. 

Q.  Hand  guard? 

A.  Fig.  2.  To  protect  the  hand  when  the  barrel  of  the  gun 
becomes  heated. 

Q.  Guard? 

A.  Fig.  3.  To  protect  the  trigger.  Also  anchors  the  barrel 
and  stock  by  means  of  two  screws. 

Q.  Bolt? 

A.  Fig.  4.  Contains  firing  and  extracting  mechanism. 

Q.  Barrel? 

A.  Fig.  5.  Has  front  sight  stud  and  rear  sight  base  at- 
tached and  the  bore  has  four  lands  and  grooves.  The 
twist  is  uniform,  one  turn  in  ten  inches. 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  7 

Q.  Receiver? 

A.  Fig.  6.  Contains  loading,  firing,  extracting  and  ejecting 

mechanism. 
Q.  Butt  plate? 

A.  Fig.  7.  To  protect  the  butt  of  the  stock. 
Q.  Upper  band? 

A.  Fig.  8.  Fastens  muzzle  of  barrel  to  stock. 
Q.  Magazine  spring? 

A.  Fig.  9.  Presses  against  and  lifts  the  follower. 
Q.  Follower? 
A.  Fig.  10.  Holds  cartridges  in  proper  position  for  loading 

and  unloading. 
Q.  Extractor? 

A.  Fig.  11.  Draws  cartridges  and  shells  from  chamber. 
Q.  Floor  plate? 

A.  Fig.  12.  Contains  seat  for  magazine  spring. 
Q.  Firing  pin? 

A.  Fig.  13.  Forces  striker  forward  when  main  spring  is  re- 
leased. 

Q.  Movable  base? 

A.  Fig.  14.  Movable  base  for  rear  sight  leaf  and  is  used  to 
correct  for  windage. 

Q.  Rear  sight  leaf  and  slide? 

A.  Fig.  15.  Used  for  setting  correct  elevation  for  firing. 

Q.  Trigger? 

A.  Fig.  16.  For  discharging  the  piece. 

Q.  Lower  band? 

A.  Fig.  17.  Binds  stock  and  hand  guard  to  barrel. 

Q.  Sleeve? 

A.  Fig.  18.  Connects  bolt  and  firing  pin. 

Q.  Cut-off? 

A.  Fig.  19.  Regulates  use  of  cartridges  in  magazine.  When 
''OFF''  allows  rifle  to  be  used  as  a  single  loader; 
when  *'0N"  as  a  magazine  loader  and  in  middle 
position  allows  bolt  to  be  taken  from  receiver. 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  9 

Q.  Safety  lock? 

A.  Fig.  20.  To  prevent  the  piece  from  being  accidentally- 
discharged. 

Q.  Main  spring? 

A.  Fig.  21.  When  released  it  supplies  the  striker  with  suf- 
ficient force  to  explode  the  primer. 

Q.  Stacking  swivel? 

A.  Fig.  22.  It  is  attached  to  upper  band  and  is  used  for 
forming  stacks. 

Q.  Lower  band  swivel? 

A.  Fig.  23.  Holds  upper  end  of  sling. 

Q.  Butt  swivel? 

A.  Fig.  24.  Holds  lower  end  of  sKng. 

Q.  Lower  band  spring? 

A.  Fig.  25.  Prevents  lower  band  from  slipping. 

Q.  Firing  pin  sleeve? 

A.  Fig.  26.  Connects  firing  pin  and  striker.  Also  holds 
main  spring  in  place. 

Q.  Striker? 

A.  Fig.  27.  Explodes  the  primer  in  cartridge. 

Q.  Butt  plate  screw,  large? 

A.  Fig.  28.    Fastens  toe  of  butt  plate  to  stock. 

Q.  Butt  plate  screw,  small? 

A.  Fig.  29.  Fastens  heel  of  butt  plate  to  stock. 

Q.  Butt  swivel  screw? 

A.  Fig.  29.  Fastens  butt  swivel  to  stock.  May  be  used  in 
heel  of  butt  plate  if  necessary. 

Q.  Cut-off  spindle? 

A.  Fig.  30.  For  the  cut-off  to  work  on. 

Q.  Rear  guard  screw? 

A.  Fig.  31.  Secures  the  guard  to  the  receiver. 

Q.  Windage  screw,  assembled? 

A.  Fig.  32.  Secures  the  movable  base  to  the  fixed  base. 

( \.  Upper  band  screwl 


10  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Fig.  33.  Secures  upper  band  to  stock. 

Q.  Cut-oflF  spindle  screw? 

A.  Fig.  34.  To  hold  cut-off  spindle  in  place. 

Q.  Sear  joint  pin? 

A.  Fig.  35.  Hinges  the  sear  to  the  receiver. 

Q.  Lower  band  screw? 

A.  Fig.  36.  Fastens  lower  band  swivel  to  lower  band. 

Q.  Stacking  swivel  screw? 

A.  Fig.  37.  Fastens  stacking  swivel  to  upper  band  and  is 
longer  than  lower  band  screw. 

Q.  Front  guard  screw? 

A.  Fig.  38.  Secures  the  guard  to  the  receiver. 

Q.  Joint  pin? 

A.  Fig.  39.  Hinge  for  sight  leaf. 

Q.  Cut-off  spring  spindle? 

A.  Fig.  40.  Keeps  the  cut-off  in  its  seat  in  the  receiver. 

Q.  Front  sight? 

A.  Fig.  42.  Set  in  slot  in  movable  stud. 

Q.  Cut-off  spring? 

A.  Fig.  43.  Sets  over  cut-off  spring  spindle. 

Q.  Sear  spring? 

A.  Fig.  44.  Holds  sear  in  place. 

Q.  Front  sight  pin? 

A.  Fig.  45.  Fastens  front  sight  to  movable  base. 

Q.  Oiler  and  thong  case? 

A.  Fig.  46.  To  carry  oil,  cleaning  brush  and  thong.  It  is 
kept  in  butt  of  piece. 

Q.  Floor  plate  catch  spring? 

A.  Fig.  47.  Holds  the  floor  plate  in  its  seat. 

Q.  Point  out  on  Fig.  48  the  following:  Muzzle,  Barrel,  Up- 
per Band,  Stacking  Swivel,  Stock,  Hand  Guard, 
Lower  Band,  Finger  Groove,  Bolt  Handle,  Cocking 
Piece,  Safety  Lock,  Safety  Lug,  Trigger,  Trigger 
Guard,  Small  of  Stock,  Comb,  Butt  Swivel,  Butt, 
Toe  and  Heel,  and  Bayonet  Stud. 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  11 

10.  Q.  For  what  is  the  oil  which  is  carried  in  oiler  and  thong 

case  used? 
A.  For  lubricating  the  working  parts  only. 

11.  Q.  How  should  you  put  the  oiler  and  thong  case  in  your 

rifle? 

A.  It  should  be  put  in  so  that  the  leather  tipped  cap  will 
be  next  to  the  butt  plate  cap. 

12.  Q.  After  firing  ball  cartridges  from  your  rifle,  what  re- 

mains in  the  bore? 
A.  The  burned  and  unbumed  pieces  of  smokeless  powder. 

13.  Q.  If  you  leave  this  in,  what  happens? 
A.  It  will  eat  and  wear  away  the  bore. 

14.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  end  from  which  to  clean  a  rifle? 
A.  The  breech. 

15.  Q.  What  is  issued  to  you  for  cleaning  your  rifle? 
A.  The  barrack  cleaning  rod. 

16.  Q.  What  kind  of  rags  should  you  use? 
A.  Canton  flannel. 

17.  Q.  Into  what  size  and  shape  are  these  rags  cut? 

A.  Into  squares  about  one  to  one  and  a  half  inches. 

18.  Q.  What  should  you  always  do  before  putting  your  rifle 

away? 
A.  Wipe  it  off  with  oil. 

19.  Q.  Take  the  bolt  apart  and  assemble  it, 

20.  Q.  How  do  you  clean  the  bolt? 

A.  By  taking  it  apart  and  cleaning  all  the  parts  with  an 
oiled  rag,  and  then  drying  them. 

21.  Q.  What  do  you  do  just  before  putting  the  bolt  together 

again? 
A.  Oil  lightly  the  firing  pin,  the  barrel  of  the  sleeve,  the 
well  of  the  bolt  and  all  the  cams. 

22.  Q.  How  do  you  care  for  the  stock  and  hand  guard? 

A.  Put  on  a  light  coating  of  raw  linseed  oil  once  a  month. 
Also  after  any  wetting  from  either  rain  or  dew. 

23.  Q.  Is  the  oil  rubbed  in? 


12  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Yes,  rubbed  in  well. 

24.  Q.  Are  you  allowed  to  take  your  rifle  apart? 

A.  No,  except  by  permission  of  the  company  commander. 

25.  Q.  What  is  the  greatest  range  of  your  rifle? 

A.  5465  yards,  or  about  three  and  one-tenth  miles. 

26.  Q.  What  is  the  range  of  effective  fire? 
A.  Eight  hundred  yards  and  under. 

27.  Q.  What  is  the  length  and   weight   of   your   rifle   without 

bayonet? 
A.  A  Httle  over  forty-three  inches  long  and  weighs  eight 
and  sixty-nine  one  hundredths  pounds. 

28.  Q.  What  is  necessary  in  order  that  your  rifle  will  work 

properly  and  be  free  from  rust  at  all  times? 

A.  That  the  working  parts  are  always  well  cleaned  and 
oiled. 

29.  Q.  What  should  you  do  in  case  a  cartridge  fails  to  fire? 

A.  Do  not  draw  bolt  back  immediately,  but  cock  rifle  by 
pulling  back  the  cocking  piece. 

30.  Q.  After  firing  when  should  the  rifle  be  cleaned? 

A.  Not  later  than  the  evening  of  the  day  you  fired  it. 

31.  Q.  What  cleaning  materials  are  needed   for  the  proper 

care  of  your  rifle? 
A.  A  suitable  rack  or  table  upon  which  to  fit  the  rifle  in 
notches  and  also  for  the  convenient  holding  of  the 
cleaning  material. 

(b)  A   barrack   cleaning   rod   suitable   for   cleaning 

full  length  of  bore  from  the  breech. 

(c)  Flannel  patches  cut  to  fit  the  bore  properly. 

(d)  Salsoda   dissolved   in   water — as  much   soda  as 

will  dissolve  in  the  water. 

(e)  Cosmic,  number  30,  soft — a  heavy  grease  issued 

by  the  government. 

(f)  Sperm  oil. 

(g)  Linseed  oil. 

32.  Q.  In  ordinary  cases  how  should  you  clean  the  bore? 

A.  Take  out  the  bolt.     Place  rifle  on  the  rjpaning  rack  or 


i3,  Q. 
A. 


34.  Q. 


35.  Q. 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT 

table,  soak  a  flannel  patch  in  the     o 
salsoda  solution.    With  cleaning  rod     ^ 
push  the  patch  through  bore  from 
breech,  running  it  back  and  forth     *o 
full  length  of  bore  several  times.   Do 
this    with    several    more    patches. 
Now,  do  the  same  with  several  per- 
fectly dry  patches.    Dip  a  patch  in 
the  cosmic  and  swab  the  bore  as  be- 
fore.   Put  the  rifle  away  for  the  day. 
Next  day  first  swab  out  all  the  cos- 
mic and  then  do  exactly  as  you  did 
on  the  preceding  day,  which  will 
leave  your  rifle  bore  covered  with 
a  coating  of  cosmic. 

What  is  metal  fouling? 

It  consists  of  small  flakes  of  metal  left 
near  the  muzzle  by  the  cupro-nickel 
jacket  of  the  bullet. 

What  is  the  objection  to  this  in  your 
rifle? 

If  left  in,  the  bore  will  become  pitted 
under  the  metal  fouling. 

When  should  you  look  for  metal  foul- 
ing? 


13 


r-l 

0) 


A.  When  cleaning  the  bore  and  after  you  ^ 
have  run  through  the  perfectly  dry 
patches;  examine  near  muzzle  look- 
ing through  the  muzzle  end  of  rifle. 

36.  Q.  What  does  metal  fouling  look  like? 
A.  Like  flakes,  smears  or  lumps  of  silver 

sticking  to  the  rifling. 

37.  Q.  What  should  I  do  about  it? 
A.  I  should  at  once  take  the  rifle  to  the  1 

quartermaster  sergeant,  artificer  or  £ 

other  person  designated  by  the  company  commander  to 
remove  metal  fouling. 


14  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

38.  Q.  Point  out  the  following  parts  of  the  bayonet  from  the 

cut  page  13 :  Blade,  Edge,  False  Edge,  Guard,  Scabbard 
Catch,  Pommel  and  Tang. 

Use  of  Cover  in  Connection  with  the  Rifle 

39.  Q.  When  firing  upon  the  enemy  and  taking  cover,  for  what 

must  you  look  out? 
A.  I  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and  with  good  effect  upon 
the  enemy. 

40.  Q.  How  must  you  advance  upon  the  enemy? 

A.  I  must  advance  rapidly  and  steadily  and  get  as  much 
cover  as  possible  when  I  am  doing  so. 

41.  Q.  Why  should  you  not  stay  too  long  in  any  one  place? 

A.  Because  the  enemy  is  apt  to  locate  me  and  fire  upon 
me. 

42.  Q.  Before  starting  forward  from  one  position,  what  should 

you  do? 
A.  I  should  select  the  next  position  at  which  I  want  to 
stop. 

Ammunition 

43.  Q.  How  much  ammunition  do  you  carry  in  your  belt? 
A.  One  hundred  rounds. 

44.  Q.  How  are  ball  cartridges  issued? 
A.  In  clips  of  five. 

45.  Q.  Why  does  the  bullet  have  a  sharp  point? 
A.  To  offer  less  resistance  to  the  air. 

46.  Q.  What  is  a  bandoleer? 

A.  A  bandoleer  is  an  olive  drab  cloth  cartridge  carrier 
with  six  pockets. 

47.  Q.  How  many  clips  are  there  in  a  bandoleer? 

A.  Twelve  clips,  two  in  each  pocket,  making  a  total  of 
sixty  cartridges, 

48.  Q.  How  do  you  open  the  bandoleer  pockets? 

A.  By  pulling  the  piece  of  tape  which  is  sewed  along  the 
seanx 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  15 

49.  Q.  What  ammunition  does  a  soldier  use  first  in  battle? 
A.  That  which  he  carries  in  bandoleers. 

50.  Q.  What  ammunition  should  be  held  as  reserve? 

Ao  The  thirty  rounds  which  he  carries  in  the  right  three 
pockets  of  his  field  belt. 

51.  Q.  When  does  he  use  this  reserve  ammunition? 
A.  Only  when  ordered  by  an  officer. 

52.  Q.  How  much  ammunition  will  a  soldier  have  for  use  during 

a  one  day's  fight? 
A.  That  which  he  carries  with  him  into  the  fight  and  what 
he  may  pick  up  from  the  dead  and  wounded. 

53.  Q.  Why  is  it  very  important  that  he  should  save  his  am- 

munition? 

A.  Because  when  his  ammunition  is  gone  he  is  almost 
helpless. 

54.  Q.  How  many  bandoleers  does  he  carry  when  he  goes 

into  a  fight? 

A.  Two. 

55.  Q.  How  much  ammunition  does  that  give  him? 

A.  One  hundred  rounds  in  belt  and  one  hundred  and  twenty 
rounds  in  the  bandoleers,  in  all  two  hundred  and 
twenty  rounds. 

56.  Q.  If  he  is  sent  forward  with  ammimition  to  the  firing 

Une,  would  he  remain  upon  the  firing  line  or  return? 
A.  Remain  on  the  firing  line  and  fight,  always. 

57.  Q.  Should  he  ever  leave  the  firing  line  to  get  ammunition? 
A.  No. 

58.  Q.  Should  he  ever  leave  the  firing  line  without  proper 

authority  for  any  purpose? 

A.  No.     If  he  does  he  is  guilty  of  "skulking." 

59.  Q.  What  are  the  names  of  the  parts  of  the  cartridge? 

A.  Brass  case,  primer,  charge  of  smokeless  powder  and 
the  bullet. 

60.  Q.  What  information  is  stamped  on  the  case? 


61. 

Q. 

A, 

62. 

Q. 

A, 

63. 

Q. 

A. 

64. 

Q. 

16  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  The  initials  of  the  place  of  manufacture,  the  number  of 
the  month  and  year  of  manufacture. 
Of  what  is  the  bullet  made? 

A  core  of  lead  and  tin  composition  with  a  jacket  of 
cupro-nickel. 

Intrenching  Tool 
For  what  purpose  are  you  issued  intrenching  tools? 
To  help  protect  myself  against  the  enemy's  fire. 
What  thickness  of  dry  sand  will  protect  you  from  rifle 

fire? 
About  ten  inches. 
How  much  moist  sand? 
A.  About  fourteen  inches. 

65.  Q.  How  much  dirt  without  sand? 
A.  About  twenty  inches. 

66.  Q.  What  kind  of  a  trench  does  Fig.  1,  page  17,  show? 
A.  Hasty  cover  trench. 

67.  Q.  What  kind  of  a  trench  does  Fig.  2,  page  17,  show? 
A.  Kneeling  trench. 

68.  Q.  What  kind  of  a  trench  does  Fig.  3,  page  17,  show? 
A.  Deep  and  narrow  fire  trench. 

69.  Q.  What  kind  of  a  trench  does  Fig.  4,  page  17,  show? 

A.  Same  as  mmiber  3,  except  that  a  passage  way  has  been 
provided. 

70.  Q.  What  kind  of  a  trench  does  Fig.  5,  page  17,  show? 

A.  Same  as  number  4,  except  that  overhead  cover  has  been 
provided. 

71.  Q.  What  kind  of  a  trench  does  Fig.  6,  page  17,  show? 

A.  The  Spanish  trench.    This  trench,  unlike  all  the  others 
shown  in  cut,  has  no  parapet. 

72.  Q.  What  is  headcover? 

A.  Sand  bags,  logs  or  other  material  placed  on  parapet 
to  afford  protection  to  the  head  while  firing. 

73.  Q.  What  is  overhead  cover? 


►•ar.-, 


H'DBBP. 


17 


18  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Overhead  cover  is  provided  by  placing  planks  or  poles 
under  parapet.  These  are  covered  with  earth  and  sod 
of  sufficient  thickness  to  protect  the  men  in  trench 
from  fragments  of  shrapnel  bursting  overhead.  See 
Fig.  5,  page  17. 

74.  Q.  What  is  a  traverse? 

A.  A  partition  of  earth  dividing  a  trench  into  smaller  por- 
tions, such  as  squad  or  platoon  lengths;  it  reduces 
the  effect  of  fire  from  the  flanks. 

75.  Q.  What  is  a  cover  trench? 

A.  A  cover  trench  is  a  trench  built  in  rear  of  the  fire  trench 
to  afford  protection  for  the  support. 

76.  Q.  What  is  a  communicating  trench? 

A.  One  which  connects  the  fire  trench  with  the  cover  trench. 
It  is  deep  and  narrow  and  usually  zigzagged  to  escape 
fire  from  the  flanks. 

77.  Q.  When  you  have  sand  bags  in  trench  when  and  for  what 

are  they  used? 
A.  For  head  cover  when  actually  flring  on  the  enemy. 
At  other  times  they  should  be  left  in  the  bottom  of 
trench. 

78.  Q.  When  you  put  your  sand  bags  up  for  head  cover,  how 

should  they  be  arranged  or  fixed  to  give  you  greatest 
amount  of  protection  with  the  greatest  field  of  fire? 

A.  They  should  be  placed  on  the  parapet  forming  an  angle 
with  the  narrow  end  of  angle  toward  trench. 

79.  Q.  What  should  you  do  to  the  fresh  earth  from  your  trenches? 
A.  Cover  it  with  grass,  twigs,  etc. 

80.  Q.  Why  do  you  do  this? 

A.  To  make  them  harder  for  the  enemy  to  see. 

{Note)    A  good  method  for  instruction  in  intrenching  is  to 

construct  models  of  the  various  trenches  out  of  thin 

lumber  or  sand  on  a  scale  of  1  to  12. 

81.  Q.  What  care  should  you  take  of  intrenching  tools? 

A.  Should  be  kept  sharp  and  clean,  free  from  rust  and  in 
serviceable  condition  at  all  times. 


The  Infantry  Equipment,  Model  1910. 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  19 

82.  Q.  How  should  the  pickaxe  be  used? 

A.  Should  be  worked  from  front  to  rear,  not  sideways. 
Lift  the  pick  well  above  the  head  with  both  hands. 
The  helve  should  slide  easily  through  the  hand  near- 
est the  pickhead,  and  full  use  should  be  made  of 
weight  of  the  tool. 

83.  Q.  How  should  the  shovel  be  used? 

A.  The  thigh  should  be  used  to  help  in  thrusting  shovel 
imder  the  earth  which  has  been  loosened  by  the  pick. 
Throw  the  earth  without  a  jerk,  the  hand  nearest  the 
blade  sliding  freely  up  the  handle. 

The  Infantry  Equipment,  Model  1910 

84.  Q.  Using  plate,  show  your  instructor  the  following  parts 

of  your  equipment: 

1.  Pack  carrier  7.  1st  aid  pouch 

2.  Haversack  and  flap  8.  Pack  suspenders 

3.  Coupling  strap  9.  Canteen  cover 

4.  Binding  straps  of  haver-  10.  Lower  suspension  rings 

sack  11.  Meat  can  pouch 

5.  Cartridge  belt  12.  Belt  suspenders 

6.  Pack  binding  straps        13.  Flap  for  intrenching  tool 

85.  Q.  How  should  you  adjust  the  belt? 

A.  So  that  it  will  fit  loosely  about  the  waist  and  rest  well 
down  over  the  hip  bones  and  below  the  pit  of  the 
stomach. 

86.  Q.  Why  do  you  wear  suspenders  with  this  belt? 

A.  It  distributes  the  weight  over  the  body,  part  on  the 
shoulders  and  part  on  the  waist. 

87.  Q.  In  adjusting  the  belt,  of  what  should  you  be  careful? 
A.  To  see  that  the  adjustment  is  made  equally  from  both 

ends  of  the  adjusting  strap,  so  that  the  centre  eye- 
let will  come  in  the  middle  of  back  of  the  belt  when 
it  is  worn. 

88.  Q.  How  should  you  fill  the  belt? 

A.  (a)  Unsnap  the  flap  of  the  pocket  and  the  interior  re- 
taining snap. 


20  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

(b)  Lay  the  retaining  strap  out  fiat  in  prolongation 
of  the  pocket. 

(c)  Insert  a  clip,  points  of  bullets  up,  in  front  of  retain- 
ing strap. 

(d)  Press  clip  down  until  base  of  clip  rests  on  bottom 
of  pocket. 

(e)  Press  retaining  strap  over  the  bullet  points  and 
fasten  it  to  the  outside  of  pocket  by  means  of  fastener 
provided. 

(f)  Insert  a  second  clip,  points  down,  in  rear  of  first  clip. 

(g)  Press  down  until  points  rest  on  bottom  of  pocket. 
(h)  Close  the  flap  of  the  pocket  and  fasten  with  fast- 
ener provided.    Fill  other  pockets  in  the  same  way. 

89.  Q.  Where  should  you  attach  the  first  aid  pouch? 

A.  Under  the  second  pocket  of  the  right  section  of  the 
belt,  unless  armed  with  pistol,  then  I  wear  it  on  the 
left  side  of  belt. 

90.  Q.  Where  should  you  attach  the  canteen? 

A.  Under  the  rear  pocket  of  the  right  section  of  the  belt. 

91.  Q.  How  should  you  attach  the  pack  carrier  to  the  haver- 

sack? 

A.  (a)  Spread  haversack  on  groimd,  inner  side  down,  outer 
flaps  to  front, 
(b)  Place  buttonholed  edge  of  carrier,  lettered  side  up, 
over  buttonholed  edge  of  haversack  and  lace  together 
with  coupling  strap,  beginning  at  the  centre. 

92.  Q.  How  should  you  attach  the  cartridge  belt  to  the  haver- 

sack? 

A.  (a)  Place  haversack  and  pack-carrier  on  the  ground, 
inner  side  down. 

(b)  Place  the  cartridge  belt,  pockets  down  and  tops 
to  the  front,  along  the  junction  of  the  haversack  and 
carrier. 

(c)  Insert  the  hook  on  rear  belt  suspender  in  centre 
eyelet  of  adjusting  strap,  so  that  end  of  hook  will 
be  on  outside  of  belt. 

(d)  Insert  the  hooks  on  ends  of  front  belt  suspenders 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  21 

in  eyelets  between  the  second  and  third  pockets  from 
the  outer  ends  of  the  belt,  so  that  end  of  hooks  will 
be  on  the  outside  of  the  belt. 

93.  Q.  How  should  you  attach  the  bayonet  scabbard  to  the 

haversack? 

A.  (a)  Pass  lower  end  of  bayonet  scabbard  through  loop 
provided  on  the  side  of  the  haversack  body, 
(b)  Engage  double  hook  attachment  in  the  eyelets  on 
outer  flap  of  haversack  inserting  hooks  from  inside. 

94.  Q.  How  should  you  attach  the  intrenching  tool  carrier 

to  the  haversack? 

A.  (a)  Fold  outer  flap  of  haversack  over  so  that  meat  can 
pouch  is  on  top. 
(b)  Pass  intrenching  tool  carrier  underneath  meat  can 
pouch  and  engage  double  hook  attachment  in  eyelets 
in  the  flap  provided,  inserting  the  hooks  from  the 
underside. 

95.  Q.  Where  should  the  meat  can,  knife,  fork,  and  spoon  be 

carried? 
A.  In  the  meat  can  pouch. 

96.  Q.  How  should  the  pack  be  rolled? 

A.  (a)  Spread  shelter  half  on  ground  and  fold  in  the  tri- 
angular ends  to  make  a  square,  the  guy  on  the  inside. 

(b)  Fold   poncho   once   across   its   shortest   dimension 
and  lay  it  in  centre  of  shelter  half. 

(c)  Fold  blanket  same  way. 

(d)  Place  it  on  poncho. 

(e)  Put  pins  in  fold  of  blanket,  in  centre  and  across 
shortest  dimensions. 

(f)  Fold  edges  of  shelter  half  snugly  over  blanket  and 
poncho. 

(g)  Beginning  on  a  side,  roll  tightly. 

97.  Q.  From  which  side  of  pack  do  you  roll? 

A.  (a)  From  short  side  if  the  short  pack  is  to  be  worn. 
(b)  From  long  side  if  the  long  pack  is  to  be  worn. 

98.  Q.  When  is  the  short  pack  worn? 

A.  When  rations,  toilet  articles  and  underwear  are  car- 


22  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

ried  in  haversack  just  above  upper  end  of  rolled 
pack. 

99.  Q.  When  is  the  long  pack  worn? 

A.  When  rations  are  not  carried  and  the  bacon  and  con- 
diment cans  (the  latter  inside  the  former),  toilet 
articles  and  underwear  are  rolled  up  in  the  pack. 

100.  Q.  How  should  the  equipment  be  adjusted? 

A.  (a)  Put  on  the  equipment  as  you  would  slip  on  a  coat, 
slipping  arms  one  at  a  time  through  pack  suspenders. 

(b)  Get  another  man  to  help  you. 

(c)  Raise  or  lower  belt  by  means  of  adjusting  buck- 
les on  belt  suspenders  until  belt  is  in  proper  posi- 
tion. 

(d)  Raise  or  lower  it  in  rear  until  adjusting  strap  lies 
smoothly  across  small  of  the  back. 

(e)  Using  adjusting  buckles  on  pack  suspenders,  raise 
or  lower  the  load  on  the  back  until  top  of  haversack 
is  level  with  top  of  shoulders. 

101.  Q.  What  is  the  most  important  point  in  adjusting  the 

equipment? 
A.  To  see  that  the  top  of  haversack  is  level  with  the  top 

of  shoulders  and  that  pack  suspenders  are  exactly 
V,         level  from  where  they  are  sewn  on  haversack  top 

to  where  they  touch  the  top  of  shoulders. 

102.  Q.  Why  should  the  top  of  haversack  be  level  with  the 

top  of  shoulders? 
A.  So  that  load  will  not  tend  to  tear  pack  suspenders 
where  they  are  sewn  to  haversack. 

103.  Q.  How  do  you  get  rid  of  the  pack  without  taking  off  the 

rest  of  the  equipment? 

A.  Getting  someone  to  help  you  will  save  time. 

(a)  Unsnap  pack  suspenders  from  the  suspension  rings 
and  snap  them  in  eyelets  on  top  of  belt  and  in  rear 
of  rear  pockets  on  both  sides. 

(b)  Support  bottom  of  pack  with  left  hand  and  with 
right  grasp  coupling  strap  (which  is  laced  through 
the  button  holes)  at  its  middle. 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  23 

(c)  Withdraw  first  one  end  and  then  the  other  from 
the  button  holes. 

(d)  Press  down  gently  on  pack  with  both  hands  and 
remove  pack. 

(e)  Lace  coupling  strap  into  button  holes  along  up- 
per edge  of  pack  carrier. 

(f)  Adjust  the  pack  suspenders. 

104.  Q.  Where  can  I  find  complete  detailed  information  about 

the  Infantry  Equipment  and  pictures? 
A.  In  pamphlet  number   1717  called   ''Instructions  for 
assembling  the  Infantry  Equipment,  model  of  1910/' 
issued  by  the  War  Department  to  each  company. 

105.  Q.  How  will  you  get  hold  of  it? 
A.  Ask  my  company  commander. 

106.  Q.  When  is  the  pack  a  protection  to  you? 

A.  When  I  am  lying  down  under  shrapnel  fire. 

Care  of  Leather  Equipment 
For  organizations  having  leather  equipment. 

107.  Q.  What  should  be  done  to  preserve  the  life  of  leather? 

A.  It  should  be  cleaned  whenever  dirt,  grit  or  mud  has 
collected  on  it  or  when  it  has  become  wet. 

108.  Q.  How  can  you  tell  as  to  the  condition  of  leather  equip- 

ment? 
A.  So  long  as  the  leather  is  reasonably  pliable,  looks  and 
feels  well,  no  oil  should  be  used,  and  soap  and  polish 
sparingly  applied. 

109.  Q.  How  should  you  clean  leather  equipment? 

A.  Carefully  wash  each  part  with  a  sponge  moistened 
with  a  thick  lather  made  from  clean  water  and 
castile  soap;  then  rub  it  vigorously  until  thoroughly 
dry. 

110.  Q.  How  should  you  obtain  a  surface  polish? 

A.  Apply  a  thick  lather  made  from  clean  water  and  Frank 
Miller's  soap,  allow  lather  to  dry  and  then  rub 
thoroughly  with  a  soft  cloth. 


24  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

111.  Q.  If  you  desire  only  a  polish  of  your  personal  leather 

equipment  what  should  be  done? 
A.  Use  the  dressing  supplied  by  the  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment.   Apply  sparingly  to  the  surface  and  rub  briskly 
with  a  dry  cloth. 

112.  Q.  What  should  be  done  when  leather  becomes  hard  and 

dry  from  exposure  to  wet  or  other  cause? 
A.  It  should  be  carefully  washed  and  then  oiled. 

113.  Q.  How  should  it  be  washed  in  this  case? 

A.  Use  a  damp  sponge,  squeezed  nearly  dry,  rub  it  on 
castile  soap  and  manipulate  so  as  to  form  a  thick 
lather,  apply  lather  to  surface  of  leather  and  let  it 
stand  until  dry.  When  dry  remove  with  a  clean, 
damp  sponge;  spots  particularly  soiled  may  be  rubbed 
with  a  moist,  soaped  cloth. 

114.  Q.  How  should  it  then  be  oiled? 

A.  While  surface  of  the  leather  is  still  slightly  moist  from 
the  washing  apply  ''Neat's  Foot  OiF'  with  a  cloth, 
moistened  but  not  wet  or  saturated  with  the  oil. 
The  equipment  should  now  be  left  alone  for  some 
time,  a  day  if  practicable,  and  then  thoroughly  rubbed 
with  a  coarse,  dry  cloth  until  the  surface  is  clean. 

115.  Q.  If  equipment  is  properly  cared  for  how  often  will  it 

be  necessary  to  oil  it? 
A.  Not  more  than  three  or  four  times  a  year. 

116.  Q.  When  will  this  not  be  sufficient? 

A.  Under  exceptional  conditions  of  warm,  moist  climate 
or  frequent  wetting  and  drying. 

Care  of  Clothing  and  Shoes 

117.  Q.  Who  is  responsible  for  the  proper  care  and  appear- 

ance of  your  clothing? 
A.  I  am. 

118.  Q.  What  is  best  rule  to  follow  as  to  spots  on  clothing? 
A.  Remove  as  soon  as  possible. 

119.  Q.  What  will  take  out  paint? 


RIFLE  AND  EQUIPMENT  25 

A.  Turpentine. 

120.  Q.  In  what  two  ways  can  you  remove  grease  spots? 

A.  (1)  Place  a  piece  of  brown  paper,  newspaper  or  other 
absorbent  paper  over  and  under  the  stain  and  press 
with  a  hot  iron. 
(2)  Moisten  a  clean,  woolen  rag  with  gasolene,  rub 
the  cloth  briskly  and  press  with  a  hot  iron. 

121.  Q.  What  adds  very  greatly  to  the  appearance  of  all  uni- 

forms? 
A.  To  keep  them  neatly  pressed. 

122.  Q.  What  is  an  inexpensive  way  to  keep  a  good  crease  in 

a  pair  of  trousers? 
A.  Moisten  the  crease  lightly  with  a  moist  sponge,  place 
them  inside  of  blanket  once  folded  on  top  of  your 
mattress.    By  sleeping  on  them  the  heat  of  your 
body  will  give  an  excellent  crease. 

123.  Q.  What  care  should  you  give  your  buttons? 

A.  Gilt  ornaments  and  buttons  should  be  frequently  pol- 
ished. Bronze  ornaments  and  buttons  should  be 
merely  wiped  clean. 

124.  Q.  How  should  you  remove  dirt  and  mud  from  leggins, 

haversacks,  canteen  covers  and  articles  of  web  equip- 
ment? 
A.  Wait  until  they  dry  and  remove  with  a  stiff  brush  be- 
ing careful  not  to  injure  the  material. 

125.  Q.  How  should  you  remove  grease  spots  from  leggins, 

haversacks,  canteen  covers  and  articles  of  web  equip- 
ment? 
A.  The  best  way  is  to  immerse  the  article  completely  in 
gasolene.  If  not  enough  gasolene  on  hand,  make 
a  suds  from  H.  &  H.  soap  (furnished  by  Ordnance 
Department)  completely  immerse  the  article  in  the 
suds  and  rub  the  soiled  parts  gently  in  clean  water. 

126.  Q.  Ordinarily  what  care  is  necessary  for  the  shoes? 
A.  Keep  them  clean  and  polished. 

127.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  shoes  when  they  become 

thoroughly  wet? 


26  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Fill  them  with  dry  oats,  bran  or  sand  and  dry  in  the 
shade;  never  near  a  fire. 

128.  Q.  If  the  leather  becomes  hard,  dry  or  stiff  what  should 

be  done? 

A.  Give  shoes  a  slight  coating  of  "Neat's  Foot  Oil,''  well 
rubbed  in. 

129.  Q.  Where  is  ''Neat's  Foot  Oil"  obtained? 

A.  Apply  to   the   Company   Quartermaster  Sergeant  as 
each  company  is  supplied  with  it. 

Inspection  of  Equipment 

129|.Q.  How  is  your  personal  field  equipment  displayed  for  in- 
spection of  quarters,  permanent  camp  or  shelter  tent 
camp? 
A.  Always  in  the  same  manner;  picture  and  description  is 
given  on  pages  172  and  173,  Infantry  Drill  Regula- 
tions, 1911. 


CHAPTER  II 
INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS 

Definitions 

130.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  '^battle  sight"? 

A.  The  position  of  the  rear  sight  when  the  leaf  is  laid  down. 

131.  Q.  When  is  the  battle  sight  used? 

A.  For  firing  at  ranges  up  to  547  yards;  not  so  accurate 
as  the  fixed  sight  and  used  when  excitement,  noise, 
etc.,  prevents  giving  ranges  and  the  proper  setting  of 
the  fixed  sight. 

132.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  "column"? 

A.  When  troops  are  arranged  one  behind  another  it  is 
called  a  column.  Example — a  column  of  squads, 
a  column  of  twos,  a  column  of  files. 

133.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  distance? 

A.  Distance  is  space  measured  from  front  to  rear.  Ex- 
ample— the  distance  between  front  and  rear  rank 
is  40  inches;  also  distance  between  ranks  in  a  column 
of  squads  is  40  inches. 

134.  Q.  How  is  distance  measured? 

A.  From  the  back  of  the  man  in  front  to  the  breast  of 
the  man  in  rear. 

135.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  ''distance"  and  "in- 

terval"? 
A.  Distance  is  measured  from  front  to  rear,  but  interval 
is  measured  from  right  to  left.    Example — my  dis- 
tance from  my  front  rank  man  is  40  inches  but  my 
interval  from  the  man  next  to  me  in  ranks  is  4  inches. 

136.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  "file"? 

A.  A  file  is  two  men,  the  front  rank  man  and  his  rear  rank 
man. 

137.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  "file  leader"? 

27 


28  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  The  front  rank  man  is  spoken  of  as  the  file  leader. 

138.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  ''blank  file''? 

A.  When  the  rear  rank  man  is  missing  the  file  is  spoken 
of  as  a  blank  file. 

139.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  file  when  there  is  but  one  rank? 
A.  One  man  is  then  called  a  file. 

140.  Q.  What  are  ''file  closers"? 

A.  Officers  and  Non-commissioned  Officers  posted  in  rear 
of  the  line, 

141.  Q.  Why  are  they  posted  in  rear  of  the  line? 

A.  To  see  that  I  perform  my  duties  properly,  and  to  assist 
the  captain  and  platoon  leaders  in  fire  control  and 
fire  direction. 

142.  Q.  When  spoken  to  by  a  file  closer  while  in  ranks,  what 

should  you  do? 
A.  Obey  at  once  as  he  is  a  better  judge  of  what  should 
be  done  than  I  am. 

143.  Q.  Why  should  you  obey  promptly? 

A.  (a)  So  that  the  appearance  and  worth  of  my  com- 
pany will  be  improved. 

(b)  To  play  my  part  in  the  team  to  which  all  the  men 
of  the  company  belong. 

(c)  To  keep  out  of  trouble  myself. 

144.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  "flank"? 

A.  The  right  or  left  of  a  body  of  troops.    Example— 
the  right  flank  of  the  company. 
t45.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  "formation"? 

A.  When  the  company  falls  in  for  drill  or  other  exercise 
it  is  called   "a  formation  of  the  company."    Ex- 
ample— ^when  I  am  not  in  ranks  at  roll  call  I  am 
absent  from  the  "formation." 
146.  Q.  What  other  meaning  has  the  word  "formation"? 

A.  It  is  also  used  to  mean  "arrangement."  Example — 
in  what  formation  or  "arrangement"  is  your  com- 
pany? Answer — in  line;  in  column  of  squads;  in 
column  of  twos,  etc. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  29 

147.  Q.  When  you  are  at  battle  exercise  what  is  meant  by  the 

word  ''front''? 
A.  The  direction  of  the  enemy  is  always  the  front. 

148.  Q.  What  is  a  guide? 

A.  An  Officer,  Non-commissioned  Officer  or  Private  upon 
whom  I  am  required  to  dress  while  marching. 

149.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  'Intervar'? 

A.  Space  measured  from  right  to  left.  Example — my  inter- 
val from  the  man  on  my  right  in  ranks  is  4  inches. 

150.  Q.  How  is  interval  measured? 

A.  From  elbow  to  elbow.  Example — ^my  interval  from 
the  man  on  my  right  in  ranks  is  4  inches  measured 
from  his  left  elbow  to  my  right  elbow. 

151.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  "close  order''  drill? 

A.  The  ordinary  drill  on  the  parade  ground,  in  which 
I  keep  the  intervals  and  distances  which  I  had  when 
I  was  first  formed  by  the  1st  Sergeant.  Example 
— ^when  marching  in  column  of  squads  the  company 
is  in  "close  order." 

152.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  "extended  order"? 

A.  When  the  company  is  formed  with  greater  intervals 
than  is  ordinarily  used  on  the  parade  ground  it  is 
called  "extended  order."  Example — ^when  the  com- 
pany is  formed  as  skirmishers  it  is  in  "extended 
order." 

153.  Q.  Why  is  close  order  used? 

A.  To  teach  habits  of  discipline  and  exactness. 

154.  Q.  Why  is  extended  order  used? 

A.  To  teach  the  movements  and  formations  that  are 
found  to  be  the  best  when  face  to  face  with  the  enemy. 

155.  Q.  In  extended  order  how  do  troops  march? 

A.  They  march  "at  ease,"  with  pieces  at  "the  trail"  un- 
less otherwise  ordered. 

156.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  "a  pace"? 

A.  Thirty  inches;  it  is  the  length  of  the  full  step  I  am  re- 
quired to  take  when  marching  at  quick  time. 


30  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

157.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  "a  rank"? 

A.  A  line  of  men  placed  side  by  side.    Example — the 
front  rank;  the  rear  rank. 

158.  Q.  Where  will  you  find  any  of  the  above  words  officially 

explained? 
A.  In  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911 — front  of  book, 
under  ''Definitions/'  pages  7  and  8. 

Introduction 

159.  Q.  Why  are  you  given  instruction  in  your  duties  as  a 

soldier? 
A.  Because  it  makes  me  more  valuable  as  a  fighting  man 
and  success  in  battle  is  our  main  object. 

160.  Q.  At  drills  or  battle  exercises  when  is  the  enemy  said 

to  be  ''imaginary"? 
A.  When  he  is  merely  assumed  to  be  at  a  certain  place. 

161.  Q.  When  is  the  enemy  said  to  be  "outlined"? 

A.  When  a  few  men  have  been  sent  out  to  indicate  the 
enemy's  lines. 

162.  Q.  When  is  the  enemy  said  to  be  "represented"? 

A.  When  a  body  of  troops  has  been  sent  out  to  act  as 
the  enemy. 

General  Rules  for  Drills  and  Formations 

163.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  given  the  command  1.  In 

Place;  2.  Halt? 
A.  I  halt,  stand  fast  and  keep  my  rifle  as  it  was. 

164.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  given  the  command  1.  Re- 

sume; 2.  March? 
A.  I  take  up  the  movement  I  was  executing  just  before 
"1.  In  Place;  2.  Halt;"  was  given. 

165.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  given  the  command  1.  As 

you  were? 
A.  I  stop  the  movement  I  am  executing  and  return  to 
the  position  I  was  in  just  before  starting.    Exam- 
ple— ^ypur  company  is  in  line  at  attention;  your 


P^FANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  31 

company  commander  gives  the  command  1.  Parade; 
2.  Rest,  which  you  have  executed.  He  now  com- 
mands 1.  As  you  were.  You  should  now  return 
to  the  position  of  ''attention.'' 

166.  Q.  In  close  order  when  in  line  where  is  the  guide  of  the 

company? 
A.  Always  ''right  '*  unless  otherwise  given. 

167.  Q.  Where  is  the  guide  of  each  rank  (four  men)  when  the 

company  is  in  column  of  squads? 
A.  On  the  side  of  the  column  opposite  from  that  on  which 
the  file  closers  are  marching. 

168.  Q.  Where  is  the  guide  when  the  company  is  marching 

in  extended  order? 
A.  It  is  center,  unless  otherwise  given. 

169.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  ordered  to  "fall  in"? 

A.  (a)  I  should  look  for  and  go  to  my  proper  place  in 
ranks. 

(b)  I  should  place  the  palm  of  my  left  hand  on  my 
left  hip,  fingers  pointing  downward. 

(c)  As  soon  as  the  man  on  my  left  has  his  interval 
(4  inches)  I  should  drop  my  left  hand  to  my  side. 

170.  Q.  How  will  you  get  your  proper  interval? 

A.  By  feeling  lightly  the  left  elbow  of  the  man  on  my 
right  with  my  right  arm. 

Orders,  Commands  and  Signals 

171.  Q.  What  two  kinds  of  commands  are  given? 

A.  1.  The  preparatory  command.  2.  The  command  of 
execution. 

172.  Q.  For  what  is  the  preparatory  command  used? 

A.  To  tell  me  just  what  the  movement  is  going  to  be. 
Example — 1.  "Squads  Right,"  is  a  preparatory  com- 
mand which  tells  me  that  the  company  is  about  to 
execute  squads  right. 

173.  Q.  For  what  is  the  command  of  execution  used? 

A..  To  tell  me  exactly  when  to  execute  the  moveme^* 


32  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

described  in  the  preparatory  command.    Example 
2.  "March/'  is  a  command  of  execution  which  tells 
me  to  move  off  at  the  instant  it  is  given. 

174.  Q.  Place  the  figures  1.  in  front  of  the  preparatory  com- 

mands and  the  figures  2.  in  front  of  the  commands 
of  execution  in  the  following  commands: 
Right  shoulder  arms;  Right  by  twos,  march;  Parade 
rest. 
A.  1.  Right  shoulder  2.  Arms;  1,  Right  by  twos  2.  March; 
1.  Parade  2.  Rest. 

175.  Q.  Why  should  you  understand  signals? 

A.  Because  often  in  battle  there  will  be  too  much  noise 
to  hear  commands. 

176.  Q.  What  two  signals  only  are  given  on  the  whistle? 

A.  1.  A  short,  sharp  whistle  meaning  ''attention.'' 
2.  A  long  whistle  meaning  ''suspend  firing." 
Whistles  of  Company  Commander  and  Platoon  leaders 
have  different  sounds — I  should  pay  attention  only 
to  the  whistle  of  my  Platoon  leader. 

177.  Q.  What  signals  are  used  in  place  of  the  following  com- 

mands: 

COMMAND  SIGNAL  USED 

(a)  1.  Forward  Hand  to  shoulder  and  thrust  arm 
2.  March  in  direction  of  march. 

(b)  Halt.  Hand  to  shoulder,  thrust  upward 

and  hold  vertically. 

(c)  1.  Double  Time    Hand  to  shoulder,  thrust  upward 
2.  March.  several  times. 

(d)  1.  Squads  Right    Extend  arm  sidewards  and  move 
2.  March.  between  vertical   and   horizontal 

position  several  times. 

(e)  1.  Squads  Left    Extend  arm  sidewards  and  move 
2.  March.  between  horizontal  and  down  po- 
sitions several  times. 

(f)  1.  Squads  Right    Extend  arm  sidewards  and  move 
about  2.  March,    between  vertical  and  down  posi- 
tions several  times. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS 


33 


COMMAND 

(g)  Change  direc- 
tion (if  in  line) 
or  1.  Column 
Right  2.  March. 

(h)  1.  As  Skir- 
misher s  2. 
Guide  Centre 
3.  March. 

(i)  1.  As  Skirmish- 
ers 2.  Guide 
Right  (or  left) 
3.  March. 


0)  1.  Assemble 

2.  March. 
(k)  To   signal   the 

range     to     be 

used  in  setting 

sights. 


SIGNAL  USED 

Move  the  hand  on  side  towards 
the  change  to  the  opposite  shoul- 
der and  swing  it  fully  extended  in 
the  new  direction. 
Raise  both  arms  sidewards  to  the 
horizontal.  Swing  both  arms  up- 
ward to  the  vertical;  repeat  sev- 
eral times. 

Extend  both  arms  sidewards  to 
the  horizontal.  Keep  the  arm  on 
the  side  of  the  guide  in  this  posi- 
tion and  swing  the  other  arm  up- 
wards to  the  vertical  and  back  to 
horizontal  several  times. 
Note:  It  makes  no  difference 
whether  your  instructor  faces  you 
or  turns  his  back  when  making 
this  signal,  the  hand  on  the  side 
of  the  guide  will  be  held  station- 
ary in  either  case. 
Raise  the  arm  to  the  vertical  and 
make  small  circles. 
Extend  arm,  fist  closed,  to  mean 
''battle  sight." 

Extend  arm,  fist  closed,  and  ex- 
pose the  mmiber  of  fingers  equal 
to  the  number  of  hundred  yards 
in  the  desired  range.  To  add  or 
subtract  50  yards  from  the  range 
make  short  horizontal  line  with 
forefinger,  up  or  down  for  in- 
crease or  decrease. 
Example — ^your  instructor  ex- 
tends closed  fist  but  at  once  ex- 
poses five  fingers  followed  by 
three  more  (same  hand)  and  then 
with  his  forefinger,  pointing  up- 
wards, makes  a  short  horizontal 


34 


THE  SOLDIER^S  CATECHISM 


COMMAND 

(k — continued) 


(1)  What  range 
are  you  using, 
or  what  is  the 
range? 

(m)  Commence 
firing. 

(n)  Suspend  Fir- 
ing. 

(o)   Cease    Firing. 


(p)  Fire  faster. 

(q)  Fire  slower. 

(r)  To  swing  the 
cone  of  fire  to 
the  right  or  left. 

(s)  Fix  bayonet. 

(t)  Any  movement 
to  be  executed 
by  a  complete 
Platoon. 

(u)  Any  movement 
to  be  executed 
by  a  complete 
Squad. 


SIGNAL  USED 

line.    What  is  the  sight-setting? 

Answer — 850  yards. 

To    deduct    300    yards   hold    up 

three  fingers  pointing  downwards. 

To  add  400  yards  hold  up  four 

fingers  pointing  upwards. 

Extend    the    arms    toward    the 

person  addressed,  one  hand  open, 

palm  to  the  front,  resting  on  the 

other  hand,  fist  closed. 

Move    the    arm    extended    full 

length,  palm  down,  several  times 

horizontally  in  front  of  the  body. 

The  long  whistle  or  raise  forearm 

and  hold  steadily  in  front  of  face, 

palm  of  hand  to  the  front. 

Same   as   suspend   firing   except 

that  hand  is  swung  up  and  down 

several  times  in  front  of  face. 

Execute   rapidly   the  signal   for 

"Commence  firing." 

Execute   slowly   the   signal    for 

''Commence  firing." 

Extend  the  arm  full  length  to  the 

front,  palm  to  the  right  (left); 

swing  the  arm  to  right  (left) ;  and 

point  in  the  direction  of  the  new 

target. 

Simulate  the  movement  of  the 

right  hand  in  ''Fix  bayonet." 

Arm   is   extended    towards   that 

platoon  leader  and  small  circles 

made  with  that  hand. 

Arm  is  extended  towards  the  pla- 
toon leader  and  that  hand  is 
swung  up  and  down  from  the 
wrist,  which  will  mean  that  this 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  35 

COMMAND  SIGNAL  USED 

(u — continued)  platoon  leader  is  to  have  the  move- 

ment, whatever  it  is,  executed  by 
squad. 
(v)  Rush.  Same  as  for  "double  time." 

(w)  Are  you  Raise  the  hand,  fingers  extended 
ready?  or  I  and  joined,  palm  toward  the  per- 
am  ready.  son  addressed. 

Q.  How  do  you  usually  receive  the  above  signals? 
A.  They  usually  come  to  me  from  the  company  commander 
through  the  platoon  and  squad  leaders  whose  business 
it  is  to  read  the  signals  and  see  that  they  are  carried  out. 
Q.  What  is  the  color  of  your  company  flag? 
A.  By  looking  on  page  19,  paragraph  45,  Infantry  Drill 
Regulations,  1911,  I  can  find  the  colors  of  all  com- 
pany flags  of  a  Regiment. 
Q.  For  what  is  the  company  flag  used? 
A.  (a)  For  signalling. 

(b)  As  a  point  of  assembly  for  the  company  after  a  fight. 

(c)  To  mark  the  position  of  the  company  and  of  the 
company  commander's  tent  in  a  camp. 

School  of  the  Soldier 
Q.  What  is  the  position  of  ''attention"  in  or  out  of  ranks? 
A.  There  are  ten  parts  of  the  body  to  remember;  begin 
with  the  heels  and  work  upwards: 

1.  Heels — on  the  same  line  and  as  near  each  other 
as  possible;  most  men  should  be  able  to  stand  with 
heels  touching  each  other. 

2.  Feet — turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of 
about  45  degrees. 

3.  Knees — straight  without  stiffness. 

4.  Hips — level  and  drawn  back  slightly;  body  erect  and 
resting  equally  on  hips. 

5.  Chest — lifted  and  arched. 

6.  Shoulders — square  and  falling  equally. 

7.  Arms — hanging  naturally. 

8.  Hands — hanging  naturally,  thumb  along  the  seam  of 
the  trousers. 


36  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

9.  Head — erect  and  squarely  to  the  front;  chin  drawn 
in  so  that  axis  of  head  and  neck  is  vertical  (means 
that  a  straight  line  drawn  through  centre  of  head 
and  neck  should  be  vertical);  eyes  straight  to  the 
front. 
10.  Entire  body — ^weight  of  body  resting  equally  upon 
the  heels  and  balls  of  the  feet. 

182.  Q.  What  may  you  do  at  the  command  "fall  out"? 

A.  I  may  leave  the  ranks  but  must  remain  near  by  (close 
enough  to  hear  the  command  ''fall  in''). 

183.  Q.  Having  fallen  out,  what  do  you  do  at  the  command 

"fall  in"? 
A.  I  take  my  place  in  ranks  at  "attention." 

184.  Q.  What  may  you  do  at  the  command  "rest"? 

A.  I  may  talk  and  move  my  body  but  must  keep  one 
foot  in  place. 

185.  Q.  What  may  you  do  at  the  command  "at  ease"? 

A.  I  may  move  my  body,  but  must  keep  one  foot  in  place 
and  cannot  talk. 

Steps  and  Marching 

186.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  full  step  in  quick  time? 
A.  30  inches. 

187.  Q.  How  many  full  steps  do  you  take  to  the  minute  when 

marching  at  quick  time? 
A.  120. 

188.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  full  step  in  double  time? 
A.  36  inches. 

189.  Q.  How  many  full  steps  do  you  take  to  the  minute  when 

marching  at  double  time? 
A.  180. 

190.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  an  Officer  or  file  closer  in- 

dicates the  step  by  counting  "one,  two,  three,  four"? 
A.  If  not  in  step,  at  once  get  there;  that  is  see  that  my 
left  foot  strikes  the  ground  at  the  counts  of  one  and 
three. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  37 

191.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  half  step  in  quick  time? 
A.  15  inches. 

192.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  half  step  in  double  time? 
A.  18  inches. 

193.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  step  in  ''right  step"  or  ''left 

step"? 
A.  15  inches. 

194.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  the  step  in  "backward  march"? 
A.  15  inches. 

Manual  of  Arms 

195.  Q.  How  is  the  chamber  and  magazine  of  your  rifle  carried 

— empty  or  filled? 
A.  Always  empty,  except  when  positively  ordered  other- 
wise. 

196.  Q.  How  should  the  safety  lock  of  the  rifle  be  turned  when 

a  cartridge  is  in  the  chamber? 
A.  At  the  "safe." 

197.  Q.  When  the  rifle  is  empty  how  should  it  be  carried? 
A.  Unlocked  and  the  trigger  pulled. 

198.  Q.  If  cartridges  are  found  in  the  chamber  or  magazine 

at  "Inspection  Arms"  what  should  be  done? 
A.  Take  them  out  and  put  back  in  belt. 

199.  Q.  Except  whqi  cartridges  are  actually  used,  how  is  the 

cut-off  turned? 
A.  Off,  so  that  bolt  may  be  used  readily  to  "simulate  load." 

200.  Q.  How  is  the  rifle  carried  at  command  "Fall  in"? 
A.  At  the  "order  arms." 

201.  Q.  Armed  with  the  rifle  how  is  the  free  hand  carried  in 

"double  time"? 
A.  The  same  as  without  rifle. 

202.  Q.  In  coming  to  the  order  arms  from  any  position  how 

should  the  rifle  be  lowered  to  the  ground? 
A.  Should  be  lowered  gently  in  order  to  prevent  inj^ng 
rifle  and  unnecessary  noise. 


38  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

203.  Q.  What  movements  are  always  executed  with  rifle  at 

''the  trail''? 
A.  (a)  The  facings — as  "right  face,"  "about  face,"  etc. 

(b)  The  alignments — as  "right  dress,"  etc. 

(c)  Open  and  close  ranks. 

(d)  Taking  intervals  and  distances — as  1.  Take  interval 
to  the  right  2.  March;  1.  Take  distance  2.  March. 

(e)  The  assemblings — as  1.  Assemble  to  the  right  2. 
March. 

204.  Q.  When  at  regimental  formations,  at  whose  command 

of  execution  should  you  execute  the  manual  and 
other  movements? 
A.  At  the  command  of  execution  given  by  my  battalion 
commander. 

205.  Q.  When  your  company  is  in  line  of  skirmishers  (extended 

order)  and  is  ordered  to  fix  bayonets,  how  is  this 
done? 
A.  Each  front  rank  man  will  fix  bayonets  at  once;  when 
they  start  firing  again  the  remainder  of  the  company 
will  fix  their  bayonets  and  at  once  take  up  the  fire 
again. 

School  of  the  Squad 

206.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  "squad  leader"? 

A.  A  corporal  or  experienced  private  who  is  placed  in 
charge  of  a  squad  (7  men  and  the  leader). 

207.  Q.  When  the  corporal  steps  out  of  ranks  what  does  his 

rear  rank  man  do? 
A.  He  steps  into  the  front  rank. 

208.  Q.  Is  this  blank  file  then  covered? 
A.  No. 

209.  Q.  After  once  being  assigned  to  a  squad  what  should  you 

be  careful  not  to  go? 
A.  Not  to  allow  myself  to  be  separated  from  it. 

210.  Q.  In  case  your  squad  is  broken  uy  what  should  you  do? 
A.  I  should  at  once  join  another  squad  and  obey  its  leader- 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  39 

211.  Q.  When  marching  in  close  order  what  seven  things  should 

you  be  careful  to  do? 
A.  (a)  If  ahead  or  behind  the  Une  to  gain  or  lose  distance 
gradually,  I  should  not  jerk  back  and  forth. 

(b)  To  give  way  to  the  right  or  left  gradually. 

(c)  To  keep  my  4  inch  interval  and  40  inch  distance. 

(d)  To  keep  covered  in  file. 

(e)  To  keep  dressed  towards  the  guide. 

(f)  To  keep  my  head  and  eyes  up. 

(g)  To  carry  my  rifle  properly. 

212.  Q.  If  your  squad  has  numbers  2  and  3  blank  files,  what 

does  number  1,  rear  rank,  do  at  the  command  1. 

Stack  2.  Arms? 
A.  He  should  take  the  place  of  number  2,  rear  rank,  while 

making  and  breaking  the  stack. 
May  arms  be  stacked  with  bayonets  fixed? 
No. 
When  arms  are  stacked,  how  should  you  pass  from 

one  side  of  the  line  of  stacks  to  the  other? 
I  should  go  around  it — ^never  through  the  line  of  stacks. 
When  the  corporal  gives  the  command  ''follow  me" 

how  does  the  squad  execute  it? 

(a)  If  in  line  or  in  skirmish  line,  No.  2  front  rank  fol- 
lows the  corporal  at  about  3  paces,  the  other  men 
keeping  dressed  on  No.  2. 

(b)  If  in  column  the  head  of  the  column  follows  the 
corporal. 

At  what  gait  snould  you  execute  the  command  1.    As 

Skirmishers  2.  March? 
At  a  run. 
At   the   command   1.  Assemble   2.  March,   when   do 

you  move  at  a  double  time? 
When  my  squad  leader  continues  to  move  forward. 
If  your  squad  is  drilling  alone  under  the  corporal  and 

he  gives  the  command  1.  As  Skirmishers  2.  March, 

upon  whom  is  the  Hne  of  skirmishers  formed? 
Upon  number  2,  front  rank. 


40  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

219.  Q.  If  your  squad  is  drilling  with  other  squads  in  the  com- 

pany  or  platoon  and  the  command  1.  as  Skirmishers 
2.  March,  is  given,  upon  whom  is  the  line  of  skir- 
mishers formed  in  your  squad? 
A.  Upon  the  corporal,  who  remains  in  the  line. 

220.  Q.  When  the  squad  is  acting  alone  who  is  the  guide? 

A.  Number  2,  front  rank;  it  is  his  duty  to  follow  the  cor- 
poral. 

221.  Q.  Unless  otherwise  ordered,  what  interval  should  there 

be  between  skirmishers? 
A.  One-half  pace  (15  inches),  measured  from  elbow  to 
elbow. 

222.  Q.  In  deploying  as  skirmishers  where  does  the  rear  rank 

man  always  place  himself? 
A.  On  the  right  of  his  front  rank  file. 

223.  Q.  May  you  assemble  when  marching  to  the  rear? 
A.  No. 

Loadings  and  Firings 

224.  Q.  May  you  fire  while  marching? 

A.  No,  the  firings  are  always  executed  from  the  halt. 

225.  Q.  When  given  commands  for  firing  in  close  order,  when 

only,  does  the  rear  rank  load,  aim  or  fire? 
A.  Only  when  the  firing  is  to  be  executed  at  the  stand- 
ing position. 

226.  Q.  Your  aiming  point  or  target  having  been  given  to  you, 

when  may  you  change  to  another? 
A.  Only  when  so  ordered. 

227.  Q.  If  in  Une  of  skirmishers  may  you  load  while  moving? 

A.  Yes,  holding  my  rifle  as  nearly  as  possible  in  the  posi- 
tion of ''load." 

228.  Q.  Having  been  given  the  command  "fire  at  will,"  when 

do  you  commence  firing? 
A.  At  once,  without  further  command. 

229.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  given  the  command  or 

,.  signal  ''suspend  firing"? 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  41 

A.  I  should  lock  my  loaded  piece  and  watch  the  target. 

230.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  given  the  command  or  signal 

''cease  firing''? 
A.  I  should  lock  my  loaded  piece,  lay  down  the  sight  leaf 
and  come  to  the  order. 

The  Use  of  Cover 

231.  Q.  In  taking  cover  from  the  enemy's  fire  what  kind  of  a 

position  should  you  choose? 
A.  One  from  which  I  can  fire  easily  and  effectively  upon 
the  enemy. 

232.  Q.  How  should  you  advance  against  the  enemy? 

A.  As  steadily  and  quickly  as  possible,  keeping  out  of 
his  sight  as  much  as  possible  while  going  forward: 
I  should  always  keep  in  touch  with,  and  in  my  proper 
place  in  my  squad. 

233.  Q.  How  should  you  fire  from  behind  cover? 

A.  From  the  right  side  if  possible,  otherwise  over  the 
top. 

234.  Q.  Why  should  you  not  remain  long  in  one  place? 

A.  Because  the  enemy  will  discover  me  and  get  my  range. 

235.  Q.  Before  starting  forward  what  should  you  try  to  do? 

A.  To  pick  out  a  place  in  front  of  me  where  I  can  halt 
and  get  cover. 

236.  Q.  When  you  move  forward  why  should  you  run  rapidly? 
A.  Because  I  will  then  make  a  poorer  target  for  the  enemy. 

237.  Q.  How  should  you  get  up  to  run  forward? 

A.  I  should  spring  at  once  from  the  lying  position  to  the 
run. 

238.  Q.  Why  should  you  do  this? 

A.  So  as  not  to  make  a  target  for  the  enemy;  if  I  rise  part 
way  before  running  I  attract  his  attention  and  draw 
his  fire. 

239.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  about  to  halt? 

A.  I  should  throw  myself  at  once  from  the  running  posi- 
■I  tion  to  the  lying  position. 


42  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

240.  Q.  When  you  can  no  longer  move  forward  by  running 

what  should  you  do? 

A.  I  should  crawl  forward. 

241.  Q.  What  is  a  good  way  to  crawl  forward? 

A.  Lie  on  the  left  side,  grasp  rifle  in  right  hand  and  push 
myself  forward  with  the  right  leg. 

242.  Q.  If  you  are  alone  and  you  are  fired  upon  by  the  enemy 

what  should  you  do? 

A.  I  should  drop  to  the  ground,  look  for  cover  and  try 
to  locate  the  enemy.  I  should  not  fire  unless  to 
defend  myself  or  to  give  a  necessary  alann. 

Observation 

243.  Q.  When  in  the  field  why  should  you  always  notice  care- 

fully your  position  and  all  the  prominent  objects  near 
it? 

A.  (a)  To  practice  the  eye  in  estimating  distances. 

(b)  To  have  my  bearings  at  all  times. 

(c)  To  quickly  locate  the  enemy  in  case  he  should 
suddenly  turn  up  in  the  neighborhood. 

Night  Operations 

244.  Q.  If  sent  out  to  make  a  night  attack  what  six  things 

should  you  bear  in  mind? 

A.  (a)  Not  to  load  my  rifle  unless  ordered. 

(b)  Not  to  talk. 

(c)  Not  to  smoke  or  light  matches. 

(d)  Not  to  allow  my  equipment  to  rattle. 

(e)  To  watch  carefully  and  see  that  I  do  not  stumble  or 
make  any  unnecessary  noise. 

(f)  Not  to  allow  myself  to  become  separated  from  the 
others,  specially  those  in  my  squad. 

245.  Q.  When  required  to  fire  at  night  how  may  you  improve 

your  aim? 

A.  By  tying  a  white  rag  on  the  front  sight. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  43 

Infantry  Against  Cavalry 

246.  Q.  What  is  the  most  dangerous  thing  you  can  do  if  fight- 

ing Cavalry  or  mounted  men? 
A.  To  run  away  or  get  in  any  position  where  I  cannot 
use  my  rifle  or  bayonet. 

247.  Q.  In  a  fight  with  a  mounted  man  on  which  side  of  him 

should  you  try  to  stay? 
A.  On  his  left  side — that  is,  the  side  away  from  his  pistol 
and  saber  hand. 

248.  Q.  What  is  the  best  position  to  meet  the  charge  of  a  mounted 

man? 
A.  Standing.    A  horse  will  not  run  over  a  man  if  he  can 
help  it. 

249.  Q.  In  a  scrimmage  with  a  mounted  man  what  chance  hava 

you  against  him  with  your  bayonet? 
A.  At  least  an  even  chance. 

Patrolling 

250.  Q.  What  is  a  patrol? 

A.  A  detachment  of  men  sent  out  from  a  body  of  troops 
to  gain  information  of  the  country  or  of  the  enemy 
or  to  keep  the  enemy  from  getting  information.  In 
special  cases  it  may  be  sent  out  for  other  purposes 
— for  example,  a  patrol  might  be  sent  out  to  blow 
up  a  bridge  or  tear  up  a  railroad  track. 

251.  Q.  May  you  at  any  time  become  the  leader  of  a  patrol? 

If  so,  in  what  way? 
A.  (a)  Yes,  the  corporal  may  become  disabled  and  I  may 
be  the  private  with  the  longest  service, 
(b)  I  may  be  designated  as  an  acting  corporal  in  com- 
mand of  a  patrol. 

252.  Q.  How  large  may  a  patrol  be? 
A.  From  two  men  to  a  company. 

253.  Q.  When  should  a  patrol  be  small? 

A.  When  its  only  purpose  is  to  gain  information  and  it  does 
not  expect  to  fight  for  it  nor  to  have  to  send  back 
many  messages. 


44  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

254.  Q.  When  should  a  patrol  be  large? 

A.  When  it  may  have  to  fight  and  drive  off  enemy  patrols; 
also  when  it  may  have  to  send  back  many  messages. 

255.  Q.  In  order  to  be  a  good  patrol  leader  what  is  necessary? 
A.  (a)  Should  be  able  to  cover  a  large  tract  of  ground 

with  few  men  and  still  control  their  movements  by 
signals  or  otherwise. 

(b)  Should  be  able  to  estimate  the  strength  of  the  enemy 
when  discovered. 

(c)  Should   be   able   to    report    accurately   what    is 
discovered. 

(d)  Should  be  able  to  read  signs  correctly. 

(e)  Should  be  able  to  judge  as  to  the  importance  of 
information  received. 

(f)  Should  have  courage,  endurance,  and  good  judg- 
ment. 

(g)  Should  be  able  to  travel  across  country  off  roads 
day  and  night  without  being  lost. 

256.  Q.  With  what  should  a  patrol  leader  provide  himself 

beside  his  arms  and  ammunition? 

A.  Compass,  watch,  note  book  and  message  blanks,  and 
map  of  coimtry  if  possible. 

257.  Q.  What  should  a  patrol  leader  do  as  soon  as  he  is  given 

his  instructions  for  going  out? 

A.  (a)  He  should  make  sure  he  understands  his  instruc- 
tions by  repeating  them  to  the  Officer  who  is  send- 
ing him  out. 
(b)  If  he  has  a  map  he  should  locate  himself  and  where 
he  is  to  go  and  have  his  commander  verify  it. 

258.  Q.  After  getting  his  instructions  correctly  what    should 

the  patrol  leader  do? 

A.  (a)  Assembles  the  men  detailed  for  the  patrol. 

(b)  Inspects  their  arms  and  ammunition. 

(c)  Sees  that  none  have  maps,  papers,  etc.,  that  might 
be  of  value  to  the  enemy  in  case  of  capture. 

(d)  Sees  that  arms  and  accoutrements  do  not  glisten 
or  rattle. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  45 

(e)  Repeats  his  instructions  from  the  Officer,  to  his 
patrol  seeing  that  all  understand  them. 

(f)  Explains  the  signals  to  be  used. 

(g)  Designates  a  man  to  command  the  patrol  in  case 
the  leader  is  captured  or  disabled,  and  also  a  "get 
away  man." 

259.  Q.  What  general  rule  should  be  followed  as  to  the  forma- 

tion of  the  patrol? 

A.  (a)  Always  have  the  men  so  arranged  that  they  can 
quickly  see  my  signals;  quickh-  move  to  one  side  or 
the  other;  quickly  join  me. 
(b)  Always  adopt  a  formation  so  that  in  case  of  capture 
or  a  fight  at  least  one  man  may  escape. 

260.  Q.  What  general  formation  is  usually  adopted? 

A.  A  formation  having  a  main  or  central  body,  an  ad- 
vance guard,  a  rear  guard,  and  right  and  left  flank 
guards. 

261.  Q.  (a)  If  you  are  sent  out  with  a  patrol  of  four  men  (5 

counting  yourself)  how  would  you  arrange  them  to 
agree  with  this  general  formation? 

A.  I  would  put  one  man  about  40  yards  to  my  front  (that 
is,  towards  the  enemy),  one  man  about  40  yards  to 
my  left,  one  man  about  40  yards  to  my  right  and 
one  man  about  40  yards  in  my  rear.  I  would  then 
represent  the  main  or  central  body  myself, 
(b)  What  is  another  excellent  formation? 


i5to  r        •       p^^^* 

20  yards  | 


in  frv    r  ^    <■■■    Commander 

10  to        )  ^^  XT^      1 

15  yards  j 


•  No.  1 

No.  2 


20        t 
'^^^^    \  •  Get  away  man 

Commander  sends  Nos.  1  and  2  to  the  flanks  as  needed. 
262.  Q.  How  do  you  decide  what  the  distances  shall  be  be- 
tween parts  of  your  patrol? 


46  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  I  use  my  best  judgment. 

(a)  In  open  country  I  would  make  distances  greater 
than  in  a  close  wooded  country. 

(b)  With  a  small  patrol  I  would  not  separate  parts 
by  more  than  50  yards.  With  a  large  patrol  I  would 
put  the  limit  at  100  yards. 

263.  Q.  Are  there  any  hard  and  fast  rules  laid  down  for  dis- 

tances, formations,  movements,  etc.,  of  a  patrol? 
A.  No. 

264.  Q.  Why  is  this  so? 

A.  Because  in  each  case  things  come  up  which  require 
special  action  not  applying  to  other  cases.  No  gen- 
eral rule  will  apply.  (See  exception  question  130, 
this  pamphlet.) 

265.  Q.  How  should  a  patrol  pass  over  a  hill? 

A.  Leader  should  first  send  one  man  ahead  to  look  over 
top;  if  clear  he  should  signal  "come  on.'' 

266.  Q.  How  does  a  patrol  pass  a  house  or  inclosure? 

A.  Leader  sends  one  man  to  investigate,  or  he  avoids  it 
entirely. 

267.  Q.  How  does  a  patrol  pass  through  a  wood? 
A.  Generally  in  a  thin  skirmish  line. 

268.  Q.  What  are  some  things  that  may  indicate  the  char- 

acter of  enemy  troops? 
A.  (a)  Abandoned  camp  sites. 

(b)  Abandoned  clothing  or  equipage. 

(c)  Insignia  on  uniforms. 

(d)  Camp  fires. 

(e)  Clouds  of  dust — ^low  for  Infantry,  high  and  thin  for 
Cavalry,  a  broken  cloud  for  Artillery  or  wagons. 

269.  Q.  When  should  a  patrol  fight? 

A.  (a)  When  it  cannot  get  the  information  required  in  any 
other  way. 

(b)  When  it  has  the  information  but  has  to  fight  to  get 
back  with  it. 

(c)  When  it  was  sent  out  to  keep  the  enemy  from  getting 
information. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  47 

(d)  When  it  has  done  what  it  was  sent  out  to  do  and 
fighting  will  keep  the  enemy  from  learning  something. 
Must  not  fight  if  it  interferes  with  doing  what  patrol 
was  sent  out  to  do,  must  not  fight  just  to  be  fighting; 
always  have  a  good  reason. 

270.  Q.  When  a  patrol  leader  gets  important  information  what 

should  he  do? 
A.  Unless  patrol  is  to  return  at  once  the  leader  should 
send  the  information  back  by  one  of  the  members 
of  the  patrol. 

271.  Q.  In  the  conduct  of  a  patrol  what  is  very  important? 

A.  That  you,  as  leader,  require  the  members  to  contin- 
ually watch  you  for  signals  and  to  promptly  obey 
your  orders,  which  may  be  expressed  verbally  or 
by  signals. 

Messages 

272.  Q.  What  is  a  message? 

A.  A  short  account  of  something  that  has  happened;  much 
like  a  telegram. 

273.  Q.  If  a  patrol  leader  sends  a  written  message  what  should 

it  contain? 
A.  (a)  From  whom  sent.    Example — Corporal  Jones'  Pa- 
trol, or,  if  numbered.  Patrol  No.  3. 

(b)  Location  of  Patrol  when  message  was  sent — ^200 
yards  north  of  Smith's  farmhouse. 

(c)  Date— 15  Sept.,  15;  22  July,  14,  etc. 

(d)  Thehour— 8:45  A.M. 

(e)  The  number — No.  2,  meaning  the  second  mes- 
sage this  patrol  had  sent  out. 

(f)  To  whom  sent— To  Comdg.  Officer,  Co.  F.  3  Inf. 

(g)  Body  of  message. 

(h)  Signature  of  patrol  leader — ^Jones,  Corpl. 
(i)  How  sent — ^foot  messenger,  motorcyclist,  etc. 

274.  Q.  How  should  the  information  be  written  in  the  message? 
A.  In  my  best  hand-writing  using  only  necessary  words. 

275.  Q.  What  form  is  followed  for  a  message? 


48  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  The  message  blank  furnished  companies. 

276.  Q.  In  messages  how  should  dates  be  written? 

A.  13  Aug.,  15;  5  Oct.,  14,  meaning  August  thirteenth, 
1915;  October  fifth,  1914. 

277.  Q.  How  should  a  road  always  be  spoken  of? 

A.  By    the   points    it    connects.    Example — the   Water- 
town-Madison  Barracks  Road. 

278.  Q.  Why  not  refer  to  a  road  by  one  place  only,  as  the  Water- 

town  road? 
A.  Too  indefinite — there  might  be  a  dozen  Watertown 
roads. 

279.  Q.  How  should  the  name  of  a  road  always  be  written? 
A.  Use  a  dash  to  connect  points  on  the  road.    Water- 
town-Madison    Barracks    road.    Smithville-Hender- 
son  road. 

280.  Q.  In  messages  how  should  you  refer  to  any  position? 
A.  By  points  of  the  compass — not  by  terms   "right," 

''left,''  etc.,  except  for  banks  of  streams.    Example 
— 200  yards  north  of  Smith's  farmhouse. 

281.  Q.  Why  not  use  "right,"  "left,"  etc? 

A.  Too  indefinite — does  not  give  an  exact  description  of 
position. 

282.  Q.  If  the  bank  of  a  stream  is  referred  to  as  the  "right" 

bank  or  the  "left"  bank,  what  does  it  mean? 
A.  The  right  or  left  bank  as  you  face  down  stream.     Ex- 
ample— the  right  bank  of  the  Mississippi  river  would 
be  the  western  bank. 

283.  Q.  What  is  wrong  with  the  first  message  on  next  page? 

284.  Q.  Is  the  second  message  any  better?    If,  so,  why? 

285.  Q.  If  a  verbal  message  is  to  be  sent  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Require  the  messenger  to  repeat  it  several  times  until 
he  can  state  it  to  you  exactly  as  you  want  it  delivered. 

286.  Q.  How  long  may  a  verbal  message  be? 

A.  It  should  contain  but  one  statement  only.    Example 
— Company  E  will  arrive  at  Madison  Barracks  at 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS 


49 


5:00  P.  M.  to-day.  Note — try  your  squad  or  de- 
tachment in  relaying  a  simple  verbal  message.  You 
will  be  surprised. 

287.  Q.  Which  is  better,  verbal  or  written  messages? 
A.  The  written  usually. 


"lR=TE7 


U.  S.  ARMY  FIELD  MESSAGE 


CotntDunicAted  by 
BUZ^rn.  PHONE.  TELEGRAPH, 
RADIO.  LANTERN.  HELIO^ 
FLAG.  CYCLIST,  FOOT  MESSEN- 
GER. MOUNTED  MESSENGER. 
■QJi^derioof  ineaii*  used) 


it  I  Space    for  I  Sigpa'    OpcWo.w  Only  I 


-^C.^!r.l\W 


riniA/ 


_i£^ 


Q/«W^.r^^^^g- 


KeceiTedL 


U.  S.  ARMY  FIELD  MESSAGE 


C«inmuaicated  by 
BUrZER.  PHONE.  TELEGRAPH. 
RADIO.  LANTERN.  HELIO, 
FLAG,  CYCLIST.  FOOT  MESSEN- 
GER. MOUNTEO  TAssgWSER. 
(UndeneoM  tDMona  utecl) 


Tot.0..e.^.3-.ga^- 


Date^^    ^MA^J^jifHour ^WS/lrtNoJ- 


/W>a/V^^\aX£^  ■ 


w^ 


"^ryw^^   ,<Vv^." 


Received- 


50  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

288.  Q.  How  should  a  message  be  sent  when  in  the  enemy's 

country? 
A.  (a)  Either  by  sending  two  men  together,  or  two  men 
by  different  routes. 
(b)  If  near  our  own  troops  and  no  danger  from  the 
enemy  one  man  is  enough,  especially  if  the  message  is 
not  very  important. 

289.  Q.  When  carrying  a  written  message  in  the  enemy's  country 

what  precaution  should  you  take? 
A.  I  should  figure  ahead  how  I  can  conceal  it  and  what  I 
could  do  to  destroy  it  if  threatened  with  capture. 

290.  Q.  Should  a  patrol  leader  always  send  information  at  once 

if  he  receives  information? 
A.  He  must  use  his  best  judgment  as  to  whether  or  not 
the  information  is  of  enough  importance.  If  in 
doubt,  it  is  a  safe  rule  to  send  it  in.  Always  send  it 
in  when  the  enemy  is  seen  for  the  first  time,  even  if 
only  a  patrol  in  strength. 

291.  Q.  How  should  a  patrol  leader  keep  in  touch  with  members 

of  his  patrol? 
A.  (a)  By  arm  signals. 

(b)  Any  signals  agreed  upon  before  starting. 

(c)  By  word  of  mouth  in  a  quiet  tone  to  those  near. 

292.  Q.  How  may  a  patrol  leader  signal  to  the  main  body? 
A.  Use  the  signal  flag. 

Marching 

293.  Q.  What  is  one  of  the  most  important  things  an  In- 

fantry soldier  has  to  do? 
A.  To  learn  to  march  well. 

294.  Q.  What  is  of  great  importance  in  marching? 

A.  The  care  of  the  feet  and  proper  fitting  of  shoes. 

295.  Q.  Where  can  you  obtain  useful  information  as  to  the 

proper  care  of  your  feet? 
A.  See  Questions  912  to  923  of  this  book. 

296.  Q.  Should  you  drink  water  on  the  march? 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  51 

A.  See  Questions  966  to  969  of  this  book. 

297.  Q.  What  should  you  do  at  the  first  halt  of  a  march? 
A.  See  Questions  964  and  965  of  this  book. 

298.  Q.  In  what  manner  should  you  march? 

A.  At  a  uniform  rate:  I  should  not  jerk  oack  and  forth  or 
otherwise  initate  my  comrades. 

299.  Q.  When  should  an  Infantry  soldier  fall  out  on  the  march? 
A.  Only  as  a  last  resort — ^when  absolutely  unable  to  keep 

up.    His  will  power  should  keep  him  going  after  he 
thinks  he  is  too  tired. 

300.  Q.  Why  should  he  not  fall  out? 

A.  (a)  His  worth  to  the  government  that  takes  care  of  him 
is  measured  largely  by  his  ability  to  march, 
(b)  Unless  for  a  very  good  reason,  he  is  liable  to  be  con- 
sidered a  ''weakling." 

301.  Q.  When  necessary  to  fall  out,  what  should  be  done? 

A.  Soldier  should  obtain  permit  from  an  Officer  of  his 
company  (his  captain  if  present),  and  present  it  to  the 
surgeon  who  will  dispose  of  his  case. 

302.  Q.  About  how  many  miles  does  a  company  march  in  an 

hour? 
A.  About  three  miles. 

Protection  on  the  March 

303.  Q.  How  is  a  body  of  troops  protected  from  the  enemy 

while  on  the  march? 
A,  By  covering  detachments  sent  out  to  the  front,  flanks 
and  rear.    They  are  called  Advance  Gicards,  Flank 
Guards  and  Rear  Oimrds. 

304.  Q.  Give  the  names  of  the  parts  of  an  Advance  Guard  in 

order  from  the  main  body? 
A.  Reserve,  Support,  Advance  Party. 

305.  Q.  What  does  the  Advance  Party  send  out? 

A.  A  point,  which  is  a  patrol  of  four  or  five  men.  It  may,  if 
necessary,  send  out  other  patrols  to  the  right  and  left 
called  flankers. 


52  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

306.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  Point? 

A.  (a)  to  keep  a  sharp  watch  for  the  enemy  and  to  report 
promptly  when  he  is  discovered. 

(b)  To  keep  in  communication  with  the  Advance 
Party  at  all  times,  and  obey  promptly  all  orders 
sent  forward. 

(c)  To  follow  the  right  road. 

307.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  the  flankers? 

A.  (a)  To  keep  a  sharp  lookout  for  the  enemy  and  to  report 
promptly  when  he  is  discovered. 

(b)  To  search  thoroughly  any  cover  that  might  hide  a 
detachment  of  the  enemy. 

(c)  To  keep  in  communication  with  the  Advance 
Party  whenever  possible. 

(d)  To  observe  the  surrounding  country  from  any 
heights  near  the  line  of  march. 

308.  Q.  What  generally  are  the  duties  of  all  parts  of  an  Advance 

Guard? 
A.  To  clear  the  road  and  offer  enough  resistance  to  the 
enemy  to  allow  the  next  body  in  rear  to  get  ready  to 
fight. 

309.  Q.  In  marching  against  an  enemy  where  should  we  always 

expect  to  find  our  Advance  Guard? 
A.  The  Advance  Guard  will  always  be  found  marching  in  our 
front;  that  is,  between  our  main  body  and  the  enemy. 

310.  Q.  What  are  '^ connecting  files''? 

A.  One  or  two  men  detailed  to  march  between  parts  of  an 
Advance  Guard,  or  between  Advance  Guard  and  the 
main  body. 

311.  Q.  What  are  the  duties  of  a  connecting  file? 

A.  (a)  To  keep  a  sharp  watch  both  to  front  and  rear  for 
signals. 

(b)  To  pass  on  correctly  any  signals  he  may  receive. 

(c)  To  see  that  the  next  body  in  rear  takes  the  proper 
road. 

(d)  To  see  that  proper  distances  are  kept  between  the 
body  in  his  front  and  rear. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  53 

312.  Q.  Are  all  the  parts  of  an  Advance  Guard  always  used? 
A.  No — a  company  when  marching  alone  would  use  a  point 

only,  as  its  Advance  Guard;  and  a  battalion  might  use 
only  an  Advance  Party  with  its  point  ''and  flankers  if 
necessary). 

313.  Q.  When  the  main  body  comes  to  a  halt  for  the  night  what 

takes  the  place  of  an  Advance  Guard? 
A.  The  Outpost. 

314.  Q.  Give  the  names  of  the  parts  of  a  Rear  Guard  in  order 

from  the  main  body? 
A.  Reserve,  Support,  Rear  Party. 

315.  Q.  What  does  the  Rear  Party  send  out? 

A.  A  rear  point,  which  is  a  patrol  of  four  or  five  men.  It 
may,  if  necessary,  send  out  other  patrols  to  the  right 
and  left  rear,  called  flankers. 

316.  Q.  When  is  a  Rear  Guard  of  great  importance? 

A.  When  our  main  body  is  retreating  from  the  enemy. 

317.  Q.  In  such  a  case  where  should  we  always  expect  to  find  our 

Rear  Guard? 
A.  Between  our  main  body  and  the  pursuing  enemy. 

318.  Q.  What  generally  is  the  duty  of  the  Rear  Guard? 

A.  To  protect  our  main  body  from  an  attack  in  rear,  and  to 
delay  the  advance  of  a  pursuing  enemy. 

319.  Q.  What  does  the  formation  of  a  Rear  Guard  look  like? 
A.  Like  an  Advance  Guard  turned  about. 

320.  Q.  May  a  Rear  Guard  have  connecting  files? 
A.  Yes,  the  same  as  an  Advance  Guard. 

321.  Q.  How  can  you  tell  how  far  apart  the  different  parts  of  an 

Advance  or  Rear  Guard  should  be  from  each  other? 

A.  That  will  be  regulated  by  the  Commanding  Ofiicer  and 
may  be  different  in  each  march 

322.  Q.  What  is  the  purpose  of  a  Flank  Guard? 

A.  To  cover  the  flank  of  a  column  of  troops  that  is  marching 
past,  or  across  the  front  of  an  enemy. 

323.  Q.  What  is  an  Outpost? 


54  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  A  covering  detachment  detailed  to  protect  troops  in 
camp  against  surprise,  and  to  hold  off  the  enemy  until 
the  troops  in  camp  can  get  ready  to  meet  him. 

324.  Q.  What  takes  the  place  of  an  Outpost  when  troops  take  up 

the  march? 
A.  The  Advance  Guard  (or  Rear  Guard  in  a  retreat). 

325.  Q.  What  does  the  formation    of  the  Outpost  look  like? 
A.  Like  a  large  fan  spread  out  between  the  camp  and  the 

enemy. 

326.  Q.  What  are  the  names  of  the  parts  of  an  Outpost  in  order 

from  the  camp? 
A.  Reserve,  the  line  of  Supports,  the  line  of  Outguards. 

327.  Q.  For  what  is  the  reserve  used? 

A.  To  support  the  troops  in  front  (that  is,  the  supports  and 
outguards) ;  or  to  hold  a  rallying  position  for  them  if 
driven  in. 

328.  Q.  For  what  is  the  line  of  supports  used? 

A.  (a)  To  do  the  fighting  if  attacked;  it  is  often  called 
''The  Line  of  Resistance.'' 
(b)  To  furnish  the  Outguards. 

329.  Q.  How  are  the  supports  numbered? 
A.  From  right  to  left 

330.  Q.  How  strong  may  a  support  be? 

A.  From  half  a  company  to  a  battalion. 

331.  Q.  Where  are  supports  usually  placed? 

A.  On  or  near  a  road  leading  towards  the  enemy. 

332.  Q.  What  are  Outguards? 

A.  The  small  detachments  that  are  sent  out  farthest  to- 
wards the  enemy. 

333.  Q.  What  kinds  of  Outguards  may  there  be? 

A.  (a)  Pickets. 

(b)  Sentry  Squads. 

(c)  Cossack  Posts. 

334.  Q.  How  are  they  numbered? 

A.  From  right  to  left  in  each  support. 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  55 

335.  Q.  What  is  a  Picket? 

A.  Two  or  more  squads,  posted  on  the  line  of  Outguards  to 
cover  a  certain  territory. 

336.  Q.  What  may  a  Picket  furnish? 
A.  (a)  Patrols. 

(b)  One   or  more  sentinels,   double  sentinels,   sentry 
squads  or  cossack  posts. 

337.  Q.  Where  are  pickets  usually  placed? 

A.  On  the  more  important  points  in  the  line  of  Outguards, 
such  as  at  road  forks. 

338.  Q.  What  is  a  Sentry  Squad? 

A.  A  squad  of  eight  men  posted  in  observation  at  a  certain 
point. 

339.  Q.  How  is  it  used? 

A.  The  corporal  posts  a  double  sentinel  to  watch  for  the 
enemy;  he  places  the  rest  nearby  under  cover  if  pos- 
sible, and  uses  them  for  2nd  and  3rd  Reliefs  and  one 
extra  man  for  messages,  etc. 

340.  Q.  What  is  a  Cossack  Post? 

A.  A  group  of  four  men  posted  in  observation  at  a  certain 
point. 

341.  Q.  How  does  the  Cossack  Post  dffer  from  the  Sentry 

Squad? 
A.  The  Cossack  Post  has  half  as  many  men  and  but  a  single 
sentry  is  kept  in  observation. 

342.  Q.  When  are  single  sentinels  (from  Cossack  Posts)  usually 

used? 
A.  In  the  day  time. 

343.  Q.  When  are  double  sentinels  (from  Sentry  Squads)  usually 

used? 
A.  At  night. 

344.  Q.  How  are  sentinel  posts  numbered? 
A.  From  right  to  left  in  each  Outguard. 

345.  Q.  Where  is  the  line  of  sentinels  placed? 

A.  Farthest  out  towards  the  enemy;  they  occupy  the 
"Line  of  Observation.'' 


56  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

346.  Q.  What  should  every  sentinel  on  Outpost  duty  know  as 
soon  as  posted  on  the  ''Line  of  Observation?" 
A.  (a)  Names  of  towns  nearby. 

(b)  Where  roads  lead  to. 

(c)  Names  of  streams. 

(d)  Direction  and  location  of  enemy,  if  known. 

(e)  Number  of  his  own  post. 

(f)  Direction  and  location  of  neighboring  sentinels  and 
of  his  own  support  or  picket. 

(g)  Names  of  his  picket  or  support  conunander. 

(h)  Whether  or  not  any  of  our  own  troops  have  passed 

out  to  the  front, 
(i)  What  to  do  if  flags  of  truce,  deserters,  or  the  enemy 

appear.     (See  page  66).    Questions  350  and  351. 
(k)  When  to  fire. 
847.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  Detached  Post? 

A.  When  a  detachment  is  sent  out  from  the  Reserve  to  cover 
roads,  or  ground  not  in  the  general  Outpost  line  it  is 
called  a  "Detached  Post." 

348.  Q.  What  is  very  necessary  between  all  parts  of  the  Outpost? 
A.  That  there  be  good  commimication  by  flags,  wire  or 

patrols. 

349.  Q.  How  can  you  tell  how  far  apart  the  different  parts  of  an 

Outpost  should  be  from  each  other? 
A.  That  will  be  regulated  by  the  Outpost  Commander  and 
may  be  different  each  day. 

350.  Q.  How  is  the  bearer  of  a  flag  of  truce  and  his  escort  re- 

ceived at  the  Outpost? 
A.  They  are  halted  by  the  sentinel  and  required  to  face  out- 
ward. They  are  then  blindfolded  and  taken  as  di- 
rected by  the  Support  Commander.  If  they  fail  to 
obey  they  are  fired  upon.  No  one  is  allowed  to  talk 
with  them  before  reaching  the  Support  Commander. 

351.  Q.  How  are  deserters  from  the  enemy  received  at  the  Out- 

post? 

A.  They  are  halted  and  required  to  lay  down  their  arms.  A 
patrol  is  sent  out  to  brinfy  thpirj  in.    If  deserters  are 


INFANTRY  DRILL  REGULATIONS  57 

pursued  by  the  enemy  they  are  ordered  to  drop  their 
arms  and  an  alarm  is  at  once  turned  in.  If  the  de- 
serters fail  to  obey  they  are  fired  upon. 

Ceremonies  and  Inspection 

352.  Q.  Where  should  you  look  to  settle  arguments  about 

questions  on  ceremonies,  such  as  parades,  reviews, 
escorts,  etc.? 
A.  In  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911,  pages  159  to  170. 

353.  Q.  Where  should  you  look  to   settle  arguments  about 

questions  on  Inspections  and  Muster? 
A.  In  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911,  pages  171  to  176. 

354.  Q.  When  marching  in  review,  in  order  to  do  your  share  to- 

wards the  appearance  of  the  company  what  six  things 
should  you  keep  in  mind? 
A.  (a)  To  keep  the  head  up. 

(b)  Eyes  off  the  ground. 

(c)  Rifle  at  the  proper  angle. 

(d)  Keep  in  step  with  the  music. 

(e)  Keep  dressed  towards  the  guide. 

(f )  Not  to  swing  the  arms  excessively. 

Tent  Pitching 

355.  Q.  For  what  is  the  shelter  half  used? 

A.  For  the  purpose  of  putting  up  a  shelter  tent  with  another 
man  who  also  has  a  shelter  half. 

356.  Q.  Where  can  you  find  complete  description  of  how  a 

shelter  tent  is  pitched? 
A.  In  paragraph  793,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911. 

357.  Q.  When  pitching  one  of  the  large  tents  (wall,  conical  or 

pyramidal)  how  should  the  pins  be  driven  into  the 
ground? 
A.  (a)  The  guy  pins  (those  farthest  out  from  tent)  are 
driven  sloping  towards  the  tent, 
(b)  Wall  pins  slope  away  from  tent. 
'"^^S.  Q.  Why  should  a  tent  always  be  ditched? 


58  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Proper  ditching  causes  rain  to  be  carried  away  from  tent; 
if  not  ditched  the  water  will  enter  under  tent  walls  and 
in  addition  to  making  it  uncomfortable  will  make  the 
inside  of  tent  damp  and  unhealthy. 

359.  Q.  During  rainy  weather  what  should  be  done  to  the  large 

tents? 
A.  The  guy  ropes  should  all  be  loosened,  otherwise  tent  is 
liable  to  tear  or  the  pins  to  be  pulled  out  of  the  ground. 

360.  Q.  In  very  rocky  ground  how  may  the  tent  be  pitched  when 

pins  cannot  be  driven? 
A.  Cut  a  pole  as  long  a;5  width  of  tent  and  thread  it  through 
the  loops  on  that  side;  by  laying  this  pole  on  ground 
and  anchoring  it  with  heavy  rocks  it  will  serve  the 
purpose  better  than  pins. 

361.  Q.  In  camp  during  good  weather  what  should  be  done  to 

the  tent? 
A.  Sides  should  be  rolled  up  and  fastened  to  allow  airing  and 
sunlight  to  enter. 


CHAPTER  III 


SIGNALING 

362.  Q.  Why  should  you  know  how  to  signal? 

A.  (a)  Because  it  increases  my  usefulness  in  peace  and  war. 
(b)  I  may,  at  any  time,  be  the  only  proficient  one 
present  when  it  is  important  to  send  or  to  receive  a 
message. 

363.  Q.  What  is  the  first  thing  to  learn  in  flag  signaling? 
A.  How  to  use  the  flag. 

364.  Q.  What  are  the  four  positions  for  flag  signaling? 
A.  (a)  Starting  position — see  figure  1. 

(b)  The  dot — see  figure  2. 

(c)  The  dash — see  figure  3. 

(d)  The  front — see  figure  4. 


Fig.  1 


365.  Q.  These  positions  look  easy,  why  do  they  give  trouble? 
A.  Because  the  beginner  is  careless  and  does  not  make  each 

movement  separate  and  distinct  from  the  one  to  follow. 
He  runs  one  into  the  other  which  makes  it  impossible 
for  the  other  party  to  read  the  letters. 

366.  Q.  What  is  l,  good  way  to  keep  the  flag  from  wrapping 

around  the  staff  while  sending  a  message? 
A.  Make  the  dots  and  dashes  with  a  sort  of  ''figure  S" 
motion  across  the  front  of  the  body. 
^67.  Q.  What  is  the  second  thing  to  learn? 

59 


60  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  The  letters  of  the  alphabet  in  the  "General  Service 
Code." 
368.  Q.  What  is  the  quickest  and  easiest  way  to  study  them? 
A.  Group  them  in  pairs  of  "opposites''  and  that  will  leave 
but  four  letters  without  ''opposites/'  as  follows: 

GENERAL  SERVICE  CODE 

(International  Morse  Code.) 
Used  for  visual  (except  semaphore)  and  sound  signaling,  radio  teleg- 
raphy, on  cables  using  siphon  recorders,  in  communication  with  the  Navy, 
and  in  intra-Field  Artillery  buzzer  communication. 


OPPOSITES 

NUMBERS 

A.— 

N  —                   H  •••• 

1 

B  ■— ...        V  •**«■                 C  — ••  — . 

2 

D  — .. 

U  ••«-                  J  •-.-.» 

3  .. 

F  ••  — 

••         L  •  — ••                 z  —  — .. 

/^     •  ••  •  MM 

G 

w—— 

5 

K  — .. 

-        R*  — 

6    «—»•••• 

P  .  — . 

~.      X— 

7  —^ 

Q 

»••«•        Y     —•■-••Ml 

8 

E  • 

T  — 

9  — — — —. 

1  •• 

M 

0 

s  ••• 

0  —  — — 

369.  Q. 

What  is  a  help  in  learning  the  numbers? 

A. 

(a)  Note  that  each  number  has  five  marks. 

(b)  Note  that— 

No.  1  has  but  one  dot. 

No.  2  has  but  two  dots. 

No.  3  has  but  three  dots. 

No.  4  has  but  four  dots. 

No.  5  has  but  five  dots. 

No.  6  has  but  one  dash. 

No.  7  has  but  two  dashes. 

No.  8  has  but  three  dashes. 

No.  9  has  but  four  dashes. 

No.  0  has  but  five  dashes. 

370.  Q. 

What  is  a  convenient  way  to  send  the  numbers  in  a 

message? 

A. 

Spell  them  out.    Example: 

27  would  be  sent  as  follows:  twenty-seven, 

SIGNALING 


61 


7th  would  be  sent  as  follows:  seventh. 
1915  would  be  sent  as  follows:  nineteen  fifteen. 
371.  Q.  What  are  the  ''conventionar'  signals  in  the  General 
Service  Code? 
A.  Certain  signals  used  to  shorten  time  of  sending  mes- 
sages, as  follows: 

CONVENTIONAL  SIGNALS 

(General  Service  Code) 


End  of  word front 

End  of  sentence front  front 

End  of  message. .  .front  front  front 

Signature  follows    sig.  front 

Error     AA  front 

Acknowledgment,  or,  I  un- 
derstand    MM  front 

Cease  signalling MMM  front 

Repeat  after  (word), 

CC  front  A  front  (word) 


Repeat  last  word,  CC  front  front 
Repeat  last  message, 

CCC  front  front  front 
Move  a  little  to  the  right . .  RR  front 
Move  a  little  to  the  left . . .  LL  front 
Move  a  little  uphill.  .UU  front 
Move  a  little  downhill,  DD  front 

Signal  faster    FF  f i  ont 

Wait    a    moment  .  —  ...front 

Break,  or  stop  sending. .  .BK  front 


PUNCTUATION 

Period -  - 

Comma — 

Interrogation — 

Hyphen  or  dash — 

Parentheses  (before  and  after  the  words) — 

Quotation  mark  (beginning  and  ending) — 

Exclamation — 

Apostrophe — 

Semicolon — 

Colon — 

Bar  indicating  fraction —  ■ 

Underline  (before  and  after  the  word  or  words  it  is  wished 

to  underline) — 

Double  dash  (between  preamble  and  address,  between 
address  and  body  of  message,  between  body  of  message 

and  signature,  and  immediately  before  a  fraction) — 

Cross — 

372.  Q.  What  is  a  slow  but  sure  way  of  getting  a 

through? 

A.  Have  receiver  repeat  each  letter  before  I  send  him  the 
next. 

Q.  What  kind  of  flag  should  be  used  against  a  dark  back- 
ground? 

A.  A  white  flag. 

Q.  What  kind  of  flag  should  be  used  against  a  light  back- 
ground? 


message 


373. 


874. 


62  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  A  dark  colored  flag. 

375.  Q.  Why  should  you  study  the  background  before  sig- 

naling? 

A.  Because  if  I  use  the  wrong  colored  flag  the  receiver 
will  be  unable  to  see  the  flag  movements  distinctly 
and  will  be  unable  to  get  the  message. 

376.  Q.  What  is  a  great  help  in  reading  a  distant  message? 
A.  A  pair  of  field  glasses. 

377.  Q.  What  other  system  of  signaling  should  you  learn  after 

the  General  Service  Code? 

A.  The  two-Arm  Semaphore  Code. 

378.  Q.  When  is  it  used? 
A.  For  short  distances. 

379.  Q.  What  advantage  has  the  "General  Service"  over  the 

''Semaphore''? 

A.  The  General  Service  can  be  used  from  the  prone  po- 
sition which  is  the  position  most  used  on  the  battle- 
field. 

380.  Q.  What  is  the  quickest  and  easiest  way  to  learn  the 

Semaphore  Code? 

A.  (a)  Learn  the  first  seven  letters  as  they  come. 

(b)  Group  the  others  in  pairs  of  "opposites"  and  that 
will  leave  but  three  letters  without  ''opposites." 

TWO   ARM   SEMAPHORE 

(a)  LEARN  the  first  seven  letters  (a  to  g  inclusive)  as  they  come. 

Note — It  will  be  noticed  that  they  follow  each  other  in  reg- 
ular order  around  the  body,  beginning  with  the 
right  low  position  for  (a)  and  ending  with  the  left 
low  position  for  (g). 

(b)  LEARN  the  following  "opposites:" 

H— Z,  I— X,  J— P,  K— V,  M— S,  N— U,  0— W,  Q— Y,| 
The  following  letters  have  no  opposites: 
h^  R,  and  T, 


SIGNALING 


63 


wfsr 


.4^ 


N 


INTERROGATORY 


•-AmTTOTTvT 


acknowlcdge: 


Y 


w 


ATTCNTlON 


NUMLRAL5 


381.  Q.  Give  the  "conventionar'  signals  in  the  Semaphore 
Code. 
A. 

CONVENTIONAL  SIGNALS  AND  INSTRUCTIONS 

(Two- Arm  Semaphore  Code.) 

To  call  or  answer:  "Attention"  followed  by  call  letter  of  station  called. 

Repeat  as  necessary. 
Both  stations  then  make  "Interval." 
Repeat  last  word:    CO  "Interval"  twice. 
Repeat  last  message:    CCC  "Interval"  three  times. 
Repeat  after  (word):  CC  "Interval"  A  (word). 
End  of  word:  "Interval." 
End  of  sentence:  "Chop-chop"  signal  (made  by  placing  both  arms  at  the 

right  horizontal  and  moving  them  up  and  down  in  a  cutting  motion). 
End  of  message:     Two  successive  "chop-chop"  signals  and  withdrawing 

^ags  from  view, 


64 


THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 


Error:  AA  "Interval"  then  repeat  word. 

To  break  in:   "Attention." 

Acknowledgment  or  understood:   R. 

"Negative,"  "Affirmative,"  or  "Interrogatory,"  followed  by  "Interval," 
give  corresponding  meanings  to  the  following  signal. 

Receiver  acknowledges  "Attention"  whenever  made,  also  "Repeat,"  etc., 
and  "End  of  message,"  when  latter  is  understood. 

While  waiting  for  "Acknowledgment,"  or  in  case  of  delay,  remain  at  "In- 
terval." 

Words  not  in  code  are  spelled  out. 

"Numerals"  precedes  every  number  sent  and  indicates  numerals  until 
"Interval"  is  made,  after  which  letters  recur  without  any  further 
indication.  When  numerals  follow  letters  no  intervening  "Inter- 
val" is  necessary.     The  numerals  are  the  first  ten  letters  in  order. 

When  communicating  with  the  Navy  numerals  will  be  spelled  out. 

382.  Q.  In  the  Semaphore  Code  what  is  the  meaning  of  the 

following  words  you  find  written  in  the  small  squares? 
A.  Error — ^A. — ^mistake. 
Negative — ^A. — no. 
Interrogatory — ^A. — a  question. 
Affirmative — ^A. — ^yes. 
Acknowledge — ^A. — I  understand. 
Numerals — ^A. — numbers  are  to  be  sent. 

383.  Q.  Why  do  you  find  numbers  (1  to  0)  written  in  the  small 

squares  on  the  left? 
A.  Because  those  flag  positions  represent  the  numbers 
as  well  as  the  letters  written  in  those  squares. 

384.  Q.  In  the  Infantry  what  are  the  signals  used  between 

firing  line  and  troops  in  rear? 
A. 

For  communication  between  the  firing  line  and  the  reserve  or  commander 
in  the  rear,  the  subjoined  signals  (Signal  Corps  codes)  are  prescribed  and 
should  be  memorized.  In  transmission,  their  concealment  from  the  enemy's 
view  should  be  insured.  In  the  absence  of  signal  flags,  the  headdress  or 
other  substitute  may  be  used. 


Letter  of 
alphabet 

If  signaled  from  the  rear  to 
the  firing  line 

If  signaled  from  the  firing 
line  to  the  rear 

AM 

CCC 

C  F 

Ammunition  going  forward 
Charge  (mandatory  at  all 

times). 
Cease  firing 

Ammunition  required. 
Am  about  to  charge  if  no  in- 
structions to  the  contrary. 
Cease  firing. 

DT 

F   

Double  time  or  "rush"  .  . . 
Commence  firing 

Double  time  or  "rush." 
Commence  firing. 

FB 

Fix  bayonots 

Fix  bayonets. 

SIGNALING 


65 


Letter  of 
alphabet 


FL 

G 

HHH 

K 

LT 

O 

(Ardois     and 

semaphore 

only.) 

(All  methods 
but  Ardois 
and  sema- 
phore.) 

P 

R 

RN 

RT 

sss 

SUF 

T 


If  signaled  from  the  rear  to 
the  firing  line 


Artillery  fire  is  causing  us 

losses. 

Move  forward 

Halt 

Negative 

Left 

What  is  the  (R.  N.  etc.)? 

Interrogatory. 


What  is  the  (R.  N.  etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 


Affirmative 

Acknowledgment 

Range 

Right 

Support  going  forward . 

Suspend  firing 

Target 


If  signaled  from  the  firing 
line  to  the  rear 


Artillery  fire  is  causing  us 

losses. 
Preparing  to  move  forward. 
Halt. 
Negative. 
Left. 
What  is  the   (R.  N.  etc.)? 

Interrogatory. 


What  is  the  (R.  N.  etc.)? 
Interrogatory. 


Affirmative. 

Acknowledgment. 

Range. 

Right. 

Support  needed. 

Suspend  firing. 

Target. 


385.  Q.  In  the  Cavalry  what  are  the  signals  used? 

A. 

All  those  used  by  Infantry  except  F  B  (Fix  Bayonets),  and  also  the  fol- 
lowing: 

M — Bring  up  horses   (if  signaled     I     M — Horses  going  forward  (if  sig- 
from  front  to  rear).  |        naled  from  rear  to  front). 

386.  Q.  In  the  Field  Artillery  what  are  the  signals  used? 

A. 

1.  The  International  Morse  Code  will  be  used  for  all  Field  Artillery 
communication,  except  by  semaphore. 

2.  The  following  abbreviations  are  prescribed  and  will  be  memorized 
for  coEomunication  by  any  method  with  the  exceptions  noted: 

Error.     (All  methods  but  Ardois  and  semaphore.) 

A Error.     (Ardois  and  semaphore  only.) 

AD....     Additional. 

A  K  T .  .     Draw  ammunition  from  combat  train. 

A  L  ....     Draw  ammunition  from  limbers. 

AM....     Ammunition  going  forward. 

A  M  C  .     At  my  command. 

A  P  ....     Aiming  point. 

B  (numerals) ....  Battery  (so  many)  rounds. 

B  S  (numerals) ....   (Such)  Battalion  station. 

B  L Battery  from  the  left. 

BR.  ...     Battery  from  the  right. 


66 


THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 


CCC. 


CF 

cs  . 

CT. 


Charge  (mandatory  at  all  times) 
instructed  to  contrary. 

Cease  firing. 

Close  station. 

Change  target . 

D Down. 

D  F Deflection. 

D  T Double  time.  Rush.  Hurry. 

F Commence  firing. 

F  C  L  (numerals) ....   On  first  piece  close  by  (so  much). 

F  L  ....     Artillery  fire  is  causing  us  losses. 

FOP  (numerals) ....   On  first  piece  open  by  (so  much). 

G Move  forward.     Preparing  to  move  forward. 

H  H  H  .     Halt.     Action  suspended. 

IX  ....     Execute.     Go  ahead.     Transmit. 

J  I Report  firing  data. 

K Negative.     No. 

K  R .  . . .     Corrector. 

L Preparatory.     Attention. 

L  C  L  (numerals) ....   On  fourth  piece  close  by  (so  much). 

LOP  (numerals) On  fourth  piece  open  by  (so  much). 

L  T  .  . . .     Left. 

L  L  ....     Left  from  the  left. 

L  R .  .  .  .     Left  from  the  right. 

L  E  (numerals) ....  Less  (so  much). 

M  D  .  .  .     Move  down. 

ML....     Move  to  your  left. 

MR...     Move  to  your  right. 

M  U  .  .  .     Move  up. 

M  0  (numerals) ....   More  (so  much). 

N Annul.     Cancel. 

O What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc.)? 

phore  only.) 

What  is  the  (R.  N.,  etc)? 

Ardois  and  semaphore.) 

Affirmative.     Yes. 

Percussion.     Shrapnel. 

Send  faster. 

Send  slower. 

Cease  sending. 

Acknowledgment.     Received. 

Regimental  station. 

Right  from  the  left. 

Right  from  the  right. 

Range 

Right. 

Subtract. 
S  C  L  (numerals) . . . 
SOP  (numerals) . . . 
S  H  . . . .     Shell 

SI Site. 

S  S  S . .  .     Support  needed. 

T Target. 

T  C  L  (numerals) On  third  piece  close  by  (so  much) 

TOP  (numerals) On  third  piece  open  by  (so  much), 

U Up. 

Y  (letter) Such  battery  station. 


Am  about  to  charge  if  no 


Interrogatory.     (Ardois  and  ser"«- 
Interrogatory.     (All  methods  bu» 


P  .... 
PS... 
QRQ 
QRS 
QRT 

R 

RS  .. 
RL.. 
RR.  . 
RN.. 
RT.. 
S 


On  second  piece  close  by  (so  much). 
On  second  piece  open  by  (so  much). 


CHAPTER  IV 
RULES  OF  LAND  WARFARE 

387.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  War? 

A.  To  defeat  the  enemy  as  soon  as  possible,  using  all  the 
methods  not  forbidden  by  the  laws  of  land  warfare. 

388.  Q.  Name  five  things  that  are  forbidden  in  time  of  war? 
A.  (a)  To  cause  suffering  for  the  sake  of  revenge. 

(b)  To  wound,  except  in  a  fight. 

(c)  To  torture  in  order  to  get  a  confession. 

(d)  To  use  poison  in  any  way. 

(e)  To  lay  waste  a  district  needlessly. 

389.  Q.  Are  you  allowed  to  deceive  the  enemy? 

A.  (a)  Yes,  but  not  in  such  a  way  as  to  break  good  faith 
with  him.  Example — It  would  be  perfectly  allowable 
to  make  the  enemy  think  he  was  surrounded  by  a  large 
force  and  in  this  way  cause  him  to  surrender  his  troops 
to  a  much  smaller  force. 

(b)  To  use  spies. 

(c)  To  persuade  the  enemy's  soldiers  to  desert. 

(d)  To  persuade  the  enemy's  soldiers  to  surrender. 

(e)  To  persuade  the  enemy's  soldiers  to  rebel. 

(f)  To  give  the  enemy  false  information. 

It  would  not  be  allowable  to  surprise  and  attack  the 

enemy  during  a  truce. 
It  would  not  be  allowable  to  use  the  Red  Cross  flag  over 

military  stores  such  as  guns,  ammunition,  etc. 

390.  Q.  Who  are  your  enemies  in  time  of  war? 

A.  The  armed  persons  belonging  to  the  enemy's  coimtry. 

391.  Q.  What  is  required  of  you  in  your  treatment  of  the  enemy 

and  his  property  if  captured  in  times  of  war? 
A.  (a)  He  must  be  humanely  treated. 

(b)  He  is  allowed  to  keep  his  personal  property  except 
arms,  horses,  military  papers  and  large  sums  of  monej' . 

67 


68  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

392.  Q.  How  must  the  unarmed  citizens  of  the  en^ny  country  be 

treated? 
A.  They  must  not  be  molested  nor  their  private  property 
disturbed,  except  when  carrying  out  a  proper  order  of 
an  officer. 

393.  Q.  How  must  the  unarmed  citizens  of  the  enemy  living  in 

our  country  be  treated? 
A.  They  must  not  be  injured  nor  their  property  taken  from 
them. 

394.  Q.  Are  you  required  to  wear  your  uniform  when  fighting  the 

enemy? 
A.  Yes. 

395.  Q.  If  you  leave  your  own  troops  and  join  the  enemy  in  time 

of  war  and  are  captured  by  your  own  troops,  for  what 
may  you  be  tried? 
A.  Desertion,  and  I  may  be  punished  with  death, 

396.  Q.  What  is  a  'Trisoner  of  War''? 

A.  Any  person  belonging  to  the  enemy's  forces  whom  we 
capiare,  and  who  has  not  broken  the  rules  of  war. 
Example — If  we  capture  an  enemy,  take  his  parole  and 
release  him,  and  again  he  is  captured  while  under  arms 
against  us,  he  is  not  entitled  to  be  a  prisoner  of  war  as 
he  has  broken  his  parole  and  may  be  punished  with 
death. 

397.  Q.  Are  armed  persons  always  the  only  ones  who  may  be 

made  ''prisoners  of  war"? 
A.  No,  persons  who  are  of  particular  use  to  the  enemy  are 
considered  as  prisoners  of  war,  if  captured.  Example 
— Couriers,  guides,  etc.  Also  newspaper  men,  min- 
isters, schoolteachers,  etc.,  if  they  urge  their  people  to 
resist  us. 

398.  Q.  What  becomes  of  the  sick  and  wounded  enemies  that  fall 

into  our  hands? 
A.  They  become  prisoners  of  war  and  are  entitled  to  our 
protection  and  care. 

399.  Q.  When  guarding  prisoners  of  war  how  must  you  treat 

them? 


RULES  OP  LAND  WARFARE  69 

A.  Humanely — ^that  is,  I  must  not  be  harsh  or  cruel  to- 
wards them. 

400.  Q.  To  whom  does  all  property  captured  by  soldiers  belong? 
A.  To  the  United  States  Government. 

401.  Q.  If  captured  as  a  prisoner  of  war  and  questioned  by  the 

enemy  what  two  things  must  you  answer  correctly? 
A.  My  true  name  and  my  rank.    Example — ^John  Smith, 
Sergeant. 

402.  Q.  What  other  information  may  you  give  correctly? 

A.  None — I  should  carefully  avoid  giving  information  that 
will  help  the  enemy. 

403.  Q.  When  questioned  in  a  friendly  manner  by  your  captors 

(the  enemy),  what  should  you  do? 
A.  I  should  at  once  suspect  that  he  is  trying  to  find  out 
about  our  troops,  their  strength,  movements,  etc.,  and 
should  avoid  giving  correct  information. 

404.  Q.  What  may  be  done  when  a  prisoner  of  war  attempts  to 

escape? 
A.  He  may  be  shot  down. 

405.  Q.  What  is  a  "parole"? 

A.  A  written  or  verbal  promise  made  by  a  captured  enemy 
in  which  he  agrees  that  if  released  and  allowed  to  go 
home  he  will  not  again  take  part  in  the  war. 

406.  Q.  Are  soldiers  allowed  to  give  their  paroles? 
A.  No,  except  through  a  commissioned  officer. 

407.  Q.  What  punishment  may  a  soldier  receive  who  gives  his 

parole  to  the  enemy,  except  through  a  commissioned 
oflScer? 

A.  His  own  government  may  punish  him  with  death  as  a 
deserter. 

408.  Q.  What  is  the  limit  of  pimishment  for  breaking  a  parole? 
A.  Death. 

409.  Q.  If  captured  as  a  prisoner  of  war  what  is  your  right  as  to 

your  religion? 

A.  I  am  entitled  to  the  free  exercise  of  my  own  religion. 


70  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

410.  Q.  What  are  '' Sanitary  Troops"? 
A.  Doctors,  hospital  corps  men,  nurses,   etc.,  who 

charged  with  the  care  of  the  sick  and  wounded. 

411.  Q.  What  protection  are  the  sanitary  troops  given  in  time  ( 

war? 
A.  They  must  not  be  fired  upon. 

412.  Q.  What  protection  are  the  sick  and  wounded  given? 
A.  They  must  not  be  fired  upon. 

413.  Q.  What  protection  are  hospitals  given? 
A.  They  must  not  be  fired  upon. 

414.  Q.  What  is  the  emblem  of  the  sanitary  service  of  an  army? 
A.  A  red  cross  on  a  white  ground,  worn  on  the  left  arm. 

415.  Q.  How  else  is  this  emblem  used? 

A.  It  is  placed  on  the  property  of  sanitary  troops;  also  used 
on  flags  over  hospitals,  ambulances,  etc.,  and  known 
as  the ''Red  Cross  Flag.'' 

416.  Q.  How  are  the  dead  on  a  battlefield  protected? 

A.  It  is  strictly  forbidden  to  rob  or  molest  them  in  any  way. 

417.  Q.  What  do  the  laws  of  war  forbid  as  to  the  use  of  weapons? 
A.  No  weapons  or  other  material  can  be  used  that  will  tend 

to  cause  unnecessary  suffering  to  those  wounded  by 
them.  Example — shrapnel,  mines,  hand  grenades  are 
allowable.  Dum-dum  bullets,  explosive  bullets, 
lances  with  barbed  heads  are  forbidden. 

418.  Q.  What  is  a  fiag  of  truce? 

A.  A  white  flag  which  means  that  the  bearer  desires  to  com- 
municate with  us. 

419.  Q.  Does  firing  stop  when  a  flag  of  truce  is  shown? 

A.  It  may  or  it  may  not.  If  the  enemy  sends  a  flag  of  truce 
and  stops  firing  himself  we  should  naturafly  also  cease 
our  fire.    He  may  want  to  surrender. 

420.  Q.  What  is  meant  when  individual  soldiers,  without  any 

special  authority,  show  white  handkerchiefs  or  flags? 

A.  They  desn^e  to  surrender  and  should  be  made  prisoners  of 


RULES  OF  LAND  WARFARE  71' 

421.  Q.  Should  you  ever  intentionally  fire  on  the  bearer  of  a  flag 

of  truce? 
A.  Never,  unless  he  shows  treachery,  or  fails  to  obey. 

422.  Q.  When  is  a  soldier  liable  to  be  taken  as  a  spy? 

A.  When  he  goes  into  the  enemy's  territory,  in  disguise  or 
under  false  pretenses,  and  attempts  to  obtain  and 
bring  back  information. 

(a)  Example — ^A  soldier  dressed  as  a  farmer  going  into 
the  enemy's  lines  and  trying  to  get  information,  would, 
if  captured,  be  tried  as  a  spy. 

(b)  Example — ^A  soldier  going  into  the  enemy's  lines 
under  protection  of  the  Red  Cross  and  trying  to  get 
information  would,  if  caught,  be  tried  as  a  spy. 

423.  Q.  Would  a  soldier  in  uniform  who  enters  the  enemy's  lines 

and  tries  to  get  information  be  liable  to  be  punished 
as  a  spy? 
A.  No,  if  captured  he  would  be  a  prisoner  of  war. 

424.  Q.  How  is  the  spy  always  punished? 
A.  By  death. 

424.  Q.  What  is  treason? 

A.  All  unauthorized  or  secret  communication  with  the 
enemy. 

426.  Q.  What  is  the  punishment  for  treason? 
A.  Usually  death. 

427.  Q.  What  is 'Tillage"? 

A.  The  forcible  taking  of  property  in  an  enemy's  country 
without  authority,  or  in  disobedience  of  orders. 

428.  Q.  What  is  the  limit  of  punishment  for  pillage? 
A.  Death. 

429.  Q.  What  is  a  "Passport"? 

A.  A  written  paper  given  to  a  person  by  a  commander  of 
troops,  authorizing  him  to  pass  freely  over  the  terri- 
torj''  occupied  by  the  troops. 

430.  Q.  What  is  a  safeguard? 

A.  (a)  A  detachment  of  soldiers  posted  to  protect  persons  or 
property. 


I 


72  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

(b)  A  written  order  posted  by  a  commander  for  the 
purpose  of  protecting  persons  or  property. 

431.  Q.  What  is  done  with  soldiers  left  behind  and  posted  as  a 

safeguard,  when  taken  by  the  enemy? 
A.  They  are  sent  back  to  their  own  forces  as  soon  as 
practicable. 

432.  Q.  What  may  be  the  punishment  for  forcing  a  safeguard^ 
A.  Death. 

433.  Q.  How  is  the  bearer  of  a  flag  of  truce  and  his  escort  re- 

ceived at  the  Outpost? 
A.  See  Question  350,  page  56,  imder  Outposts. 

434.  Q.  How  are  deserters  from  the  enemy  received  at  the  Out- 

post? 
A.  See  Question  351,  page  56,  under  Outposts. 


CHAPTER  V 
ARMY  REGULATIONS  AND  DISCIPLINE 

435.  Q.  Why  should  you  obey  Regulations? 

A.  (a)  By  doing  so  I  learn  my  duties  more  quickly, 
(b)  I  avoid  trial  or  reprimand. 

436.  Q.  Why  should  you  deposit  part  of  your  pay  each  month 

with  the  Quartermaster? 
A.  Because  it  gives  me  a  bank  account  on  which  the 
Government  pays  4  per  cent,  interest,  and  gives  me 
something  to  start  life  on  in  case  I  do  not  re-enlist. 

437.  Q.  How  can  you  deposit  this  money? 

A.  By  notifying  the  first  sergeant  of  my  company. 
488.  Q.  What  is  an  "allotment''? 

A.  When  I  request  the  Government  to  send  a  part  of 
my  pay  each  month  to  my  family  or  relatives  it  is 
called  an  allotment. 

439.  Q.  How  can  you  make  an  allotment? 
A.  By  notifying  the  first  sergeant. 

440.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  word  ''beneficiary"? 

A.  The  person  to  whom  I  wish  to  leave  the  money  the 
government  gives  me  in  case  I  am  killed  or  die  in 
"line  of  duty." 

441.  Q.  What  is  allowed  your  beneficiary  in  case  you  are  killed 

or  die  "in  line  of  duty"? 
A.  A  sum  of  money  equal  to  six  months'  of  my  pay. 
i42.  Q.  In  case  you  are  killed  or  die  "not  in  line  of  duty,"  what 
is  allowed? 
A.  Nothing. 

Clothing 

443.  Q.  Are  you  allowed  money  for  clothing  during  your  en* 
listment? 


I 


74  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Yes,  the  government  allows  me  enough  so  that  with 
proper  care  I  should  be  able  to  save  money  and 
thereby  increase  the  amount  coming  to  me  on  dis- 
charge. 

444.  Q.  How  can  you  find  out  whether  or  not  you  are  ahead 

in  your  clothing  allowance? 
A.  I  should  ask  the  first  sergeant  or  company  clerk;  if 
behind  I  shall  find  it  charged  to  me  on  the  pay  roll 
every  six  months. 

445.  Q.  Can  you  draw  this  clothing  money  at  any  time? 
A.  No,  not  until  my  discharge. 

446.  Q.  Are  you  allowed  to  sell  the  clothing  issued  you  by  the 

government? 
A.  I  am  not,  and  may  be  tried  for  doing  it. 

447.  Q.  How  should  you  care  for  your  clothing? 

A.  See  ''Rifle  and  Equipment,*'  page  24  of  this  book. 

The  Company  Fund 

448.  Q.  What  money  belongs  partly  to  you,  as  a  member  of 

your  company? 
A.  The  ''company  fund,"  which  is  kept  by  the  company 
commander  and  spent  by  him  for  the  benefit  of  the 
company. 

449.  Q.  From  where  does  this  money  come? 

A.  (a)  Monthly  savings  made  on  rations  not  drawn  from 
the  Commissary. 

(b)  Pool  and  billiards  played  in  the  company  dur- 
ing the  month. 

(c)  Part  of  the  money  the  company  barber  takes  in. 

(d)  Part  of  the  money  the  company  tailor  takes  in. 

(e)  Rent  charged  for  use  of  bicycles,  boats,  etc.,  owned 
by  the  company. 

(f)  The  company's  share  of  the  profit  made  in  the 
Post  Exchange. 

450.  Q.  How  do  you  get  any  good  out  of  the  company  fund? 

A.  A  good  part  of  my  daily  food  is  bought  from  it;  also 


ARMY  REGULATIONS  AND  DISCIPLINE         75 

phonographs,    baseball   goods,    etc.    The   company 
amusement  room  is  usually  fitted  out  from  this  fund. 


Discharges 

451.  Q.  When  your  time  is  up  what  kind  of  character  may 

you  receive  on  your  discharge? 
A.  Excellent,  Very  Good,  Good  and  Fair. 

452.  Q.  What  effect  will  an  "Excellent"  discharge  have  on 

your  future  life? 
A.  If  I  decide  to  re-enlist  at  any  time,  the  authorities 
will  be  very  willing  to  take  me  in  almost  any  com- 
pany. 
If  I  try  for  a  job  in  civil  life  my  discharge  will  often 
be  a  very  useful  recommendation. 

453.  Q.  What  effect  will  a  ''Good"  discharge  have  on  your 

future  life? 
A.  (a)  I  may  re-enlist  but  every  organization  commander 
dislikes  to  take  me. 
(b)  If  I  try  for  a  job  in  civil  life  I  had  better  keep  my 
discharge  hidden. 

454.  Q.  What  effect  will  a  "Fair"  discharge  have  on  your 

future  Kfe? 
A.  I  cannot  re-enlist. 

In  civil  life  I  should  keep  it  "dark." 

Absences 

455.  Q.  What  are  two  very  common  things  that  keep  many 

men  from  getting  Excellent  discharges? 
A.  Drunkenness  and  going  absent  without  leave. 

456.  Q.  What  effect  will  going  absent  without  leave  have  on 

your  enlistment? 
A.  (a)  I  am  required  to  remain  just  that  much  longer  to 
make  up  the  time  I  stayed  away, 
(b)  If  tried  and  found  guilty  of  absence  without  leave 
I  must  also  make  up  the  time  I  spend  in  the  Guard 
House. 


76  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

457.  Q.  What  effect  is  "going  absent"  liable  to  have  on  my 

family  or  relatives? 
A.  If  I  die  or  am  killed  while  away  without  authority 
my  beneficiary  will  not  get  the  money  given  for  a 
"line  of  duty''  death. 

Desertion 

458.  Q.  What  is  "desertion"? 

A.  When  a  soldier  absents  himself  without  leave  and 
intends  to  stay  away  for  good  it  is  called  desertion. 

459.  Q.  After  what  length  of  time  is  an  absent  soldier  dropped 

as  a  deserter? 
A.  After  such  time  as  the  Company  Commander  decides 
that  the  soldier  does  not  intend  to  return. 

460.  Q.  Is  desertion  a  crime? 

A.  Yes,  a  crime  against  my  government. 

461.  Q.  What  pimishment  is  given  for  desertion? 
A.  In  time  of  war,  it  may  be  death. 

In  time  of  peace,  such  punishment  as  a  general  court 
martial  may  direct;  this  punishment  nearly  always 
includes  dishonorable  discharge  and  loss  of  all  money 
coming  to  me  in  any  way;  also  confinement  at  hard 
labor. 

462.  Q.  Conviction  of  desertion  has  what  effect  on  a  man's 

position  in  civil  hfe? 
A.  He  can  no  longer  be  a  citizen  of  the  United  States 
and  cannot  hold  a  position  of  trust  or  profit  under 
the  United  States.    He  is  a  marked  man. 

Passes  and  Furloughs 

463.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  you  return  from  pass  or 

furlough? 
A.  If  my  pass  or  furlough  was  given  to  me  in  writing  I 
should  report  to  the  orderly  room  (or  at  place  re- 
quired at  my  post)  and  turn  it  in.  In  any  case  I 
should  let  the  first  sergeant  know  at  once  that  I  am 
back. 


ARMY  REGULATIONS  AND  DISCIPLINE         77 

464.  Q.  While  on  pass  or  furlough  may  you  spend  the  time 

around  your  barracks? 
A.  No,  unless  my  company  commander  gives  me  special 
permission. 

465.  Q.  What  is  a  furlough? 

A.  A  written  permission,  signed  by  the  commanding  officer, 
which  allows  me  to  be  absent  for  a  certain  length 
of  time.  I  am  given  ration  money  by  the  Quarter- 
master upon  my  return. 
i66.  Q.  What  should  you  do  in  case  you  are  on  pass  or  fur- 
lough and  do  not  have  enough  money  to  get  back  to 
your  post  or  station? 

A.  Report  to  the  nearest  post  or  recruiting  station. 

Retirement 

467.  Q.  When  is  a  soldier  entitled  to  retire? 

A.  After  thirty  years'  service  in  the  army,  navy  or  ma- 
rine corps,  or  in  all. 

468.  Q.  To  what  is  a  retired  soldier  entitled? 

A.  Three-quarters  of  the  pay  per  month  that  he  drew 
at  date  of  retirement  and  also  $15.75  in  place  of 
clothing,  rations,  quarters,  fuel,  and  light. 

469.  Q.  When  is  a  soldier  entitled  to  apply  for  admission  to 

the  Soldiers'  Home  at  Washington,  D.  C? 
A.  After  an  honest  and  faithful  service  in  the  army  of  20 
years. 

470.  Q.  Does  he  continue  to  be  a  soldier  if  admitted  to  the 

Home? 
A.  No,  he  receives  his  discharge  before  going. 

Medal  of  Honor 

471.  Q.  What  is  a  "Medal  of  Honor"? 

A.  A  medal  which  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  gi  yes 
to  Officers  or  Soldiers  for  acts  of  great  bravery  in 
action. 
472  Q.  What  is  a  "Certificate  of  Merit"? 


78  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  A  written  certificate  given  to  a  soldier  by  the  Pres- 
ident of  the  United  States  for  some  distinguished  act 
or  acts. 

473.  Q.  What  goes  with  a  certificate  of  merit? 

A.  Extra  pay  at  the  rate  of  $2.00  per  month. 

The  Flag 

474.  Q.  What  are  the  colors  of  the  flag  of  the  United  States? 
A.  Red,  white,  and  blue. 

475.  Q.  What  do  the  thirteen  stripes  represent? 

A.  The  thirteen  colonies,  or  states,  that  were  first  formed 
into  the  United  States  in  the  year  1776. 

476.  Q.  What  do  the  stars  represent? 

A.  One  star  for  each  state  in  the  United  States. 

The  Post  Exchange 

477.  Q.  What  is  "The  Post  Exchange''? 

A.  It  is  a  general  store  run  in  each  post  for  the  benefit 
of  the  soldiers. 

478.  Q.  Why  should  you  buy  from  the  Post  Exchange  when 

you  can? 
A.  The  profits  are  divided  among  the  different  company 
funds  and  in  that  way  I  get  more  for  my  money 
than  buying  elsewhere. 
Some  of  the  articles  are  cheaper  than  outside. 

Rosters 

479.  Q.  What  is  a  ''Roster''? 

A.  A  list  of  men  for  duty  with  a  record  of  the  duty  each 
has  done. 

480.  Q.  Who  runs  the  roster  in  a  company,  troop  or  battery? 
A.  The  First  Sergeant  under  the  Company  Commander. 

481.  Q.  How  should  a  roster  be  run? 

A.  So  that  the  one  longest  off  that  duty  will  be  the  next 
for  detail. 


ARMY  REGULATIONS  AND  DISCIPLINE         79 

4S2.  Q.  What  should  you  do  if  you  have  been  detailed  and 
do  not  think  the  roster  correct? 
A.  Ask  the  First  Sergeant  about  it  and  if  not  then  sat- 
isfied ask  permission  to  speak  to  the  company  com- 
mander. 

The  Sick 

483.  Q.  What  sho.uld  you  do  if  you  are  sick? 

A.  See  the  First  Sergeant  and  have  my  name  put  on  the 
company  sick  report  book. 

484.  Q.  What  should  you  do  if  your  teeth  need  work  done  on 

them? 
A.  See  the  Dental  Surgeon  if  there  is  one  at  my  post — 
his  work  is  free  to  enlisted  men. 

Finances 

485.  Q.  What  happens  if  you  are  careless  and  break  or  lose  gov- 

ernment property  of  any  kind? 
A.  I  am  required  to  pay  for  it. 

486.  Q.  How  is  this  usually  done? 

A.  It  is  taken  out  of  my  pay  on  the  payrolls. 

487.  Q.  When  you  receive  your  monthly  pay  what  bills  must  you 

settle  first? 
A.  Company  bills  (pool,  barber,  etc.,)  and  Post  Exchange 
bills. 

488.  Q.  Do  these  bills  always  come  before  any  outside  bills? 
A.  Yes,  unless  my  company  commander  says  otherwise. 

489.  Q.  Why  is  it  a  bad  thing  to  buy  on  credit  (called  '^jaw- 

bone") outside  of  the  company  and  Post  Exchange? 
A.  Because  I  am  very  liable  to  buy  more  than  I  can  pay  foj 
and  this  is  sure  to  make  me  trouble  sooner  or  later. 
Also  my  name  will  soon  come  up  to  the  company  com- 
mander causing  more  trouble  and  the  less  my  name 
appears  as  a  ''trouble  maker"  in  the  company  the 
better  soldier  I  am  considered. 

490.  Q.  How  much  pay  does  a  private  of  Infantry,  Cavalry, 


80  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

Artillery,   Signal  Corps  and  Quartermaster  Corps 
draw? 
A.  It  is  the  custom  of  many  persons  to  answer  as  follows* 
For  first  enlistment        $15.00  per  month 

second  18.00 

third  21.00 

fourth  22.00 

fifth  23.00 

sixth  24.00 

seventh  25.00 

While  these  amounts  are  true  as  to  the  actual  cash  paid  a 
private,  they  do  not  at  all  represent  his  pay;  for  if  he 
were  working  in  civil  life  in  most  cases  he  would  have 
to  pay  out  of  his  earnings  for  his  board,  room,  medicine 
and  doctor  bills,  fuel  and  light,  and  clothing;  all  of 
which  the  Government  furnishes  the  enlisted  man  free 
of  charge.  This  would  amount  to  at  least  $25.00  per 
month  and  this  added  to  his  cash  pay  in  the  army 
would  make  his  actual  pay  if  in  civil  life  amount  to  at 
least  $40.00  per  month,  not  counting  the  extra  pay  a 
soldier  may  draw  for  good  markmanship,  and  for  re- 
enlistment  as  shown  above. 

491.  Q.  Is  the  pay  cash  you  draw  clear  of  all  expenses? 

A.  Yes,  except  for  laundry  (which  I  may  do  myself)  and 
such  little  articles  as  tobacco,  soap,  etc.,  which  I  may 
need. 

492.  Q.  Will  a  man  in  civil  life  drawing  $40.00  per  month  be  able 

to  live  as  well  as  a  private  in  the  army? 
A.  He  will  not,  as  the  civilian  must  pay  retail  prices  for  what 
he  gets  (about  %  more).  The  Government  pays  for 
the  soldier's  clothing  and  food  at  wholesale  prices  and 
the  soldier  can  buy  from  the  Commissary  at  cost  such 
necessary  articles  as  tobacco,  soap,  towels,  etc.  Also, 
if  the  soldier  puts  in  20  years  in  the  army  he  may  go  to 
the  Soldiers'  Home  in  Washington,  D.  C,  for  the  rest 
of  his  life.  For  30  years'  service  in  the  army,  navy,  or 
marine  corps  or  in  all  he  may  retire,  drawing  f  of  his 
pay  and  $15.75  in  place  of  clothing,  rations,  quarters, 


ARMY  REGULATIONS  AND  DISCIPLINE         81 

fuel  and  light.    In  many  cases  the  civilian  must  look 
ahead  and  save  up  for  his  old  age. 

Punishment 

493.  Q.  What  may  be  done  to  you  for  breaking  Regulations? 
A.  The  company  commander  may  give  me  company  punish- 
ment or  he  may  prefer  charges  against  me  which  go  up 
to  the  commanding  officer. 

494.  Q.  Is  there  any  record  kept  of  the  punishments  you  receive? 
A.  Yes,  an  accurate  record  is  kept  and  from  it  to  a  great 

extent  my  character  is  given  on  discharge. 

495.  Q.  What  is  done  when  charges  are  preferred  against  you? 
A.  I  am  tried  by  a  court-martial. 

496.  Q.  What  kinds  of  courts-martial  are  there  in  our  army? 

A.  A  Summary  Court,  made  up  of  but  one  officer  to  try  the 
smaller  offenses. 
A  Special  Court,  made  up  of  from  three  to  five  officers. 
A  General  Court  made  up  of  from  five  to  thirteen  officers. 

497.  Q.  Which  Court  can  give  the  most  serious  punishments,  in- 

cluding dishonorable  discharge? 
A.  The  General  Court. 

498.  Q.  Are  previous  convictions  by  a  court-martial  liable  to 

count  against  you  in  a  trial? 
A,  They  are,  if  committed  within  a  year  and  in  this  enlist- 
ment; if  I  have  five  such  previous  convictions  I  shall 
probably  be  tried  by  a  General  Court  and  be  dis- 
honorably discharged  from  the  service  of  the  United 
States. 

499.  Q.  If  tried  by  a  General  or  Special  Court  who  helps  me  in 

my  defence? 
A.  An  officer  detailed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

500.  Q.  How  is  this  done? 

A.  I  should  ask  for  the  officer  by  name  if  I  want  some  par- 
ticular officer;  if  for  some  reason  the  commanding 
officer  decides  that  officer  is  not  available,  another  will 
be  detailed  for  me. 


82  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

501.  Q.  To  what  are  you  entitled  before  trial? 
A.  To  a  copy  of  the  charges. 

502.  Q.  To  what  are  you  entitled  after  trial? 
A.  To  a  copy  of  the  record  of  the  trial. 

503.  Q.  When  placed  "in  arrest"  by  the  First  Sergeant  are  you 

bound  to  obey  it? 
A.  I  am,  as  he  is  acting  under  the  authority  of  my  com- 
pany commander. 

504.  Q.  What  does  ''in  arrest''  mean? 

A.  It  means  that  I  must  remain  in  my  company  quarters  oi 
camp  until  released  by  proper  authority. 

505.  Q.  Have  the  non-commissioned  officers  of  yourcompanv 

authority  to  give  you  lawful  orders? 
A.  They  have,  and  I  am  liable  to  severe  punishment  if  I  do 
not  obey  promptly. 

506.  Q.  Are  you  the  one  to  decide  whether  or  not  the  order  is  a 

lawful  one? 
A.  Unless  it  is  very  plain  that  the  order  is  not  a  proper  one 
I  should  execute  it  and  make  my  complaint  afterwards. 

507.  Q.  Why  should  you  execute  the  order  first  in  most  cases 

even  if  you  think  it  wrong? 
A.     Because  the  non-commissioned  officer  is  probably  a 
better  judge  of  that  than  I  am  and  if  I  take  a  chance 
and  do  not  obey  a  proper  order  I  get  the  full  punish- 
ment anyway. 

508.  Q.  Where  can  you  find  all  of  the  above  points  more  fully 

covered? 
A.  In  the  "Army  Regulations"  which  I  can  see  in  the  com* 
^  pany  orderly  room. 

The  Articles  of  War 

509.  Q.  What  are  "The  Articles  of  War"? 

A.  A  set  of  rules  laid  down  by  law  for  the  government  of  our 
army. 

510.  Q.  Where  can  you  find  them? 

A.  In  the  back  of  the  "Manual  of  Courts-Martial,  U.  S. 
Army,  1917." 


ARMY  REGULATIONS  AND  DISCIPLINE         83 

511.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  things  forbidden  by  the  ''Articles  of 

War"? 
A.  (a)  Selling  or  wasting  ammunition. 

(b)  Selling,  losing  or  spoiling  horse,  arms,  clothing  or 
equipment. 

(c)  Behaving    with    disrespect    towards    commanding 

officer. 

(d)  Striking  or  attempting  to  strike  superior  officer 
while  performing  any  duty.  (This  means  non- 
commissioned officers  also.) 

(e)  Disobeying  a  lawful  order  of  a  superior. 

(f )  Joining  in  a  mutiny. 

(g)  Failing  to  report  a  mutiny. 

(h)  Failing  to  obey  at  once  the  orders  of  any  officer  or 

non-commissioned  officer  who  is  trying  to  put  down 

a  quarrel,  fray  or  disorder, 
(i)  Absence  without  leave. 
(j)  Hiring  duty  done  by  another, 
(k)  Drunkenness. 

(1)    Sleeping  on  post  or  quitting  post. 
(m)  Giving  false  alarms, 
(n)   Cowardice  and  pillage.     (See  question  41,  Rules 

of  Land  Warfare.) 
(o)   Forcing  an  Officer  to  surrender  his  troops  to  the 

enemy, 
(p)   Desertion. 
(q)   Fraudulent  enlistment, 
(r)    Punishment  by  flogging,  branding  or  tatooing. 

512.  Q.  Under  what  articles  of  war  do  most  other  offenses  come? 
A.  Under  the  96th,  which  punishes  offenses  affecting  good 

order  and  military  discipline,  and  not  elsewhere  spoken 
of. 

513.  Q.  What  are  generally  considered  as  the  two  greatest  mili- 

tary crimes? 
A.  Treason  and  cowardice.     (See  question  39,  Rules  of 
Land  Warfare.) 

514.  Q.  Besides  forbidding  you  to  do  certain  things,  what  else  do 

the  articles  of  war  cover? 


84  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  They  lay  down  certain  rules  which  protect  my  rights  as 
a  soldier. 

Miscellaneous 

515.  Q.  After  enlisting  what  duty  do  you  owe  your  parents? 
A.  I  should  write  home  at  least  every  two  weeks;  they  are 

more  interested  than  any  one  else  as  to  my  welfare,  and 
it  causes  them  needless  worry  when  I  fail  to  write. 

516.  Q.  What  is  the  proper  thing  to  do  when  you  think  you  are 

not  properly  treated  in  the  company? 
A.  Speak  to  the  First  Sergeant  about  it  and  if  not  then  satis- 
fied get  permission  to  speak  to  the  company  com- 
mander. 

517.  Q.  When  going  away  from  the  company  for  more  than  two 

or  three  days  what  should  you  do? 
A.  I  should  leave  my  address  in  the  orderly  room. 

518.  Q,  What  amount  of  money  should  you  always  have  ahead, 

and  why? 
A.  Enough  to  pay  carfare  to  home  of  my  family  in  case  I  am 
sent  for  on  account  of  serious  sickness  or  death;  other- 
wise I  shall  have  to  borrow  or  may  be  unable  to  get  the 
money  at  all. 


CHAPTER  VI 
DISCIPLINE  AND  SALUTING 

519.  Q.  What  do  our  Army  Regulations  say  about  obeying 

orders? 
A.  "All  persons  in  the  military  service  are  required  to  obey 
strictly  and  to  execute  promptly  the  lawful  orders  of 
their  superiors." 

520.  Q.  Who  are  your  superiors? 

A.  Such  Officers  and  Non-commissioned  Officers  as  are 
placed  over  me  by  proper  authority. 

521.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  word  "discipline"? 

A.  When  the  members  of  a  company  obey  fully,  promptly 
and  cheerfully  the  lawful  orders  given  them  the  com- 
pany is  said  to  have  good  "discipline." 

522.  Q.  Why  is  good  discipline  required  in  a  company? 

A.  Without  it  there  would  be  no  head  to  the  company;  each 
man  could  do  as  he  wished,  and  in  battle  this  would 
make  the  company  worthless.  A  company  requires  a 
captain  just  as  a  football  team  does,  to  obtain  good 
teamwork. 

Saluting  Officers 

523.  Q.  Why  are  you  required  to  salute  Officers? 

A*  It  is  a  mark  of  courtesy  and  courtesy  is  necessary  among 
military  men.  It  is  also  the  outward  sign  of  good 
discipline. 

524.  Q.  What  is  saluting  distance? 
A.  Within  30  paces. 

525.  Q.  Are  officers  always  saluted  when  you  are  outdoors? 
A.  Yes,  whether  they  are  in  uniform  or  not. 

526.  Q.  If  armed  with  the  rifle  how  is  an  officer  saluted  when 

outdoors? 

85 


86  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  I  give  the  rifle  salute  with  the  piece  at  right  shoulder. 

527.  Q.  When  you  salute  how  long  should  you  hold  the  hand 

in  the  saluting  position? 
A.  Until  my  salute  has  been  acknowledged  or  until  the 
officer  has  passed  or  I  have  passed  him. 

528.  Q.  Does  a  soldier  actually  at  work  cease  work  to  salute 

an  officer? 

A.  He  need  not  unless  spoken  to  by  the  officer. 
528 J. Q.  What  should  you  do  when  an  officer  enters  the  mess 
room  during  meals? 
A.  I  should  stop  eating  and  remain  seated  at  "attention.'' 

529.  Q.  If  indoors  and  under  arms  how  do  you  salute? 

A.  I  give  the  rifle  salute  from  the  ''Order"  or  ''trail." 

530.  Q.  Do  you  salute  when  indoors? 
A.  I  do. 

531.  Q.  What  should  you  do  upon  the  approach  of  an  oflScer 

if  you  are  indoors  and  not  under  arms? 
A.  If  I  am  alone  I  should  uncover,  stand  attention  facing 
the  officer  and  salute  as  he  passes.  If  there  are  several 
enlisted  men  in  the  room  the  one  first  seeing  the  ofiicer 
should  call  "attention"  so  that  all  may  hear;  all  should 
then  rise,  uncover  and  remain  standing  at  attention 
until  the  officer  leaves  the  room  or  directs  otherwise. 

532.  Q.  When  you  enter  the  orderly  room  to  speak  to  or  re- 

port to  the  company  commander  do  you  salute? 
A.  I  do.     (See  question  number  530.) 

533.  Q.  What  should  you  say  when  reporting  to  the  company 

commander? 
A.  "  Sir,  Private  Jones  reports  to  the  company  commander," 
or  "Sir,  Private  Jones  has  permission  to  speak  with 
the  company  commander." 

534.  Q.  What  should  you  do  if  seated  and  an  oflficer  passes  by? 
A.  I  should  rise,  face  towards  him  at  attention  and  salute 

at  the  proper  time.     (See  question  number  531.) 

535.  Q.  What  should  be  done  when  an  officer  approaches  a 

group  of  soldiers? 


DISCIPLINE  AND  SALUTING  87 

A.  The  first  one  to  notice  the  approach  of  the  officer 
should  call  ''attention"  and  all  should  then  give  the 
proper  salute. 
536.  Q.  What  is  the  rule  as  to  saluting  when  indoors  at  pub- 
lic places  such  as  stores,  depots,  post  exchanges,  and 
other  places  where  you  ordinarily  keep  your  cap  on? 

A.  I  should  give  the  prescribed  salute  whether  covered  or 
uncovered. 

The  Star  Spangled  Banner 

637.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  out  of  ranks  and  the  Na- 
tional Anthem  is  played  at  a  formation  such  as  at 
parade  or  retreat? 
A.  If  outdoors  I  should  stand  attention  facing  the  flag  if 
there  is  one  and  hold  my  hand  in  the  position  of  salute 
from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the  Anthem. 

538.  Q.  When  the  National  Anthem  (The  Star  Spangled  Banner) 

is  played,  other  than  at  retreat,  what  should  you  do? 
A.  I  should  stand  attention  facing  the  music  and  salute  as 
described  in  question  537. 

Note:    When  to  the  color  or  to  the  standard  is  sounded  the  same 
salutes  are  given  as  to  the  National  Anthem. 

Miscellaneous 

539.  Q.  When  the  colors  are  passing  what  should  you  do? 

A.  Give  the  prescribed  salute  with  the  right  hand,  unless 

under  arms. 
640.  Q.  Under  arms  how  would  you  salute? 

A.  Give  the  rifie  salute,  unless  posted  as  a  sentinel  when 

I  would  "present  arms." 

541.  Q.  When  the  coffin  passes  you  at  a  funeral  what  should 

you  do? 
A.  I  should  uncover  out  of  respect  to  the  dead. 

542.  Q.  What  should  a  mounted  man  do  before  addressing  an 

officer? 


88  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  He  should  dismount,  except  when  actually  on  field 
service  such  as  manoeuvers  or  in  war;  at  such  times 
it  might  be  wasting  valuable  time  to  show  this  mark 
of  respect. 

543.  Q.  When  passing  an  officer  who  is  walking  with  a  lady- 

how  should  you  salute? 
A.  Same  as  in  other  cases — with  hand  or  rifle. 

544.  Q.  If  you  are  walking  with  a  lady  and  pass  an  officer  how 

should  you  salute? 

A.  Same  as  in  other  cases. 
544|.Q.  When  is  it  proper  to  uncover  instead  of  saluting? 

A.  When  the  National  Anthem  is  being  played,  and  I  am 
in  civilian  clothes  with  hat  on;  also  when  passing  the 
uncased  National  Color  under  same  conditions.  To 
uncover  as  a  salute  I  hold  my  hat  or  cap  opposite  the 
left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand.  If  raining  I  may 
simply  raise  hat  or  cap  slightly  from  my  head. 


CHAPTER  VII 
BAYONET  COMBAT 

545.  Q.  Why  should  you  know  how  to  handle  the  rifle  and 

bayonet? 
A.  Because  in  war  hand  to  hand  combat  is  often  necessary 
for  success. 

546.  Q.  What  does  bayonet  instruction  do  for  you? 

A.  (a)  Makes  me  quick  and  proficient  in  handling  the  rifle. 

(b)  Gives  me  an  accurate  eye  and  a  steady  hand. 

(c)  Gives  me  confidence  in  myself  in  hand  to  hand 
fighting. 

(d)  If  bayonet  is  broken  or  lost  my  rifle  is  still  a  good 
weapon  in  hand  to  hand  fighting. 

547.  Q.  What  are  names  of  parts  of  the  bayonet? 
A.  See  *'Rifle  and  Bayonet." 

548.  Q.  What  is  length  of  rifle  with  bayonet  fixed? 
A.  Almost  five  feet. 

549.  Q.  What  does  the  bayonet  weigh? 
A.  One  pound. 

550.  Q.  What  does  the  rifle  with  bayonet  weigh? 
A.  A  Uttle  over  nine  and  one  half  pounds. 

551.  Q.  What  are  very  important  things  to  learn  when  firs^ 

taking  up  bayonet  instruction? 
A.  Good  foot  work  and  a  limber  body,  like  boxing  thi^ 
gives  me  a  great  advantage  over  a  slow  and  stifl 
enemy. 

552.  Q.  How  should  foot  movements  be  made  when  possible? 
A.  On  the  balls  of  the  feet — this  makes  me  quicker. 

553.  Q.  Describethepositionof  Guard  "without  arms. 

A.  (a)  The  command  is  1.  Bayonet  exercise  2.  Guard. 
Oc>^  At  command  ''Guard"  half  face  to  the  right. 
89 


554. 

Q. 

A, 

555. 

Q. 

A, 

90  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

(c)  Carry  back  and  place  the  right  foot  about  once  and 
a  half  its  length  to  the  rear  and  about  3  inches  to 
the  right,  the  feet  forming  with  each  other  an  angle 
of  about  60°,  weight  of  the  body  balanced  equally 
on  the  balls  of  the  feet,  knees  slightly  bent,  palms  of 
hands  on  hips,  fingers  to  the  front,  thumbs  to  the 
rear,  head  erect,  head  and  eyes  straight  to  the  front. 

Where  can  you  find  the  prescribed  foot  movements 
fully  explained? 

On  pages  221  and  222,  "  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911 
(with  corrections  to  November,  1913)/' 

Describe  the  position  of  "Guard"  with  arms. 

(a)  The  command  is  1.  Bayonet  Exercise  2.  Guard. 

(b)  At  command  "  Guard ''  take  the  position  of  '*  Guard '' 
as  without  arms  (except  as  to  the  hands). 

(c)  At  the  same  time  throw  rifle  smartly  to  the  front, 
grasp  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  just  below  the  lower 
band,  fingers  between  the  stock  and  gunsling,  barrel 
turned  slightly  to  the  left,  the  right  hand  grasping 
the  small  of  the  stock  about  six  inches  in  front  of 
the  right  hip,  elbows  free  from  the  body,  point  of 
bayonet  at  height  of  chin. 

556.  Q.  Name  the  movements  used  in  attacking. 

A.  (a)  Thrust  (b)  Lunge  (c)  Butt  Strike  (d)  Cut  Down  (e) 
Cut  right  (or  left). 

557.  Q.  Where  can  you  find  these  movements  fully  explained? 
A.  Under  "Attacks"  on  pages  225  and  227,  "Infantry  Drill 

Regulations,  1911   (with  corrections  to  November, 
1913)." 

558.  Q.  Name  the  movenients  used  to  defend  yourself. 

A.  (a)  Parry  Right  (b)  Parry  Left  (c)  Parry  High  (d)  Low 
Parry  Right  (or  left). 

559.  Q.  Where  can  you  find  these  movements  fully  explained? 
A.  On  page  230,  "Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911  (with 

corrections  to  November,  1913)." 

560.  Q.  How  is  the  rifle  used  for  hand  to  hand  combat  without 

a  bayonet? 


BAYONET  COMBAT  91 

A.  As  a  club  and  should  be  swung  hard  enough  to  break 
through  any  guard  or  parry. 

Q.  Where  is  the  position  of  ''Club  Rifle''  fully  described? 

A.  On  page  232,  ''Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911  (with 
corrections  to  November,  1913)/' 

Q.  In  a  bayonet  fight  should  you  simply  try  to  defend  your- 
self? 

A.  No.  I  should  press  the  fight  and  keep  my  enemy  busy 
defending  himself. 

Q.  Name  some  pointers  in  bayonet  combat. 

A.  (a)  Look  at  the  ground  when  you  start  to  fight  so  that 
you  can  move  on  that  part  which  will  give  you  the 
best  footing. 

(b)  Watch  the  enemy's  eyes,  not  his  weapon  nor  where 
you  wish  to  strike;  if  at  night  then  watch  his  weapon 
and  movements  of  his  body. 

(c)  Always  watch  for  a  chance  to  strike  enemy's  left 
hand  which  grasps  the  forward  part  of  his  rifle. 

Q.  When  is  the  butt  of  rifle  very  useful? 

A.  For  close  and  sudden  attacks;  very  useful  in  riot  duty. 

Q.  Against  a  man  on  foot  armed  with  a  sword  or  saber 

how  should  you  use  the  rifle  and  bayonet? 
A.  Be  careful  he  does  not  grab  the  muzzle  of  my  rifle. 

Attack  him  with  short,  stabbing  thrusts  and  keep  him 

beyond  striking  distance  of  his  weapon. 
Q.  Fighting  against  larger  nimibers  how  can  a  small  group 

of  men  best  protect  themselves? 
A.  By  grouping  themselves  so  that  they  cannot  be  attacked 

from  behind. 

Q.  What  should  be  done  in  fighting  a  mounted  man  armed 
with  a  saber? 

A.  Try  to  get  on  his  near  (or  left)  side.  It  is  harder  for 
him  to  make  good  use  of  his  pistol  or  saber  then. 

Q.  In  receiving  night  attacks  what  position  should  you  take? 

A.  Kneel  or  lie  down  as  the  enemy  will  then  be  easier  to 
see  against  the  skyline. 


92  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

569.  Q.  What  should  you  do  when  he  arrives  within  attacking 

distance? 
A.  I  should  rise  quickly  and  lunge  well  forward  at  the  middle 
of  his  body. 

570.  Q.  Describe  the  fencing  salute. 

A.  All  fencing  exercises,  either  by  command  or  ''at  will," 
where  two  men  engage  in  bayonet  combat  for  in- 
struction, begin  and  end  with  the  fencing  salute. 
Being  at  the  order  facing  each  other,  at  the  command 
"Salute"  each  man,  with  his  eyes  on  his  adversary, 
carries  the  left  hand  smartly  to  the  right  side,  palm 
of  the  hand  down,  thumb  and  fingers  extended  and 
joined,  forearm  horizontal,  forefinger  touching  the 
bayonet.  At  count  "two"  drop  the  arm  smartly 
by  the  side. 

571.  Q.  Describe  the  position  of  the  fencing  exercise  "Guard." 
A.  (a)  The  command  is  1.  Fencing  Exercise  2.  Guard. 

(b)  Take  position  of  "Guard"  with  arms  as  described 
in  question  No.  555. 

(c)  Bayonets  should  be  crossed,  each  man's  bayonet 
bearing  lightly  to  the  right  against  same  part  of  his 
adversary's  bayonet. 

572.  Q.  What  is  this  position  called? 
A.  The  Engage  or  Engage  Right. 

573.  Q.  Where  can  you  find  the  Fencing  Exercises  fully  ex- 

plained? 

A.  On  pages  236,  237,  238,  239  and  240,  "Infantry  Drill 
Regulations,  1911  (with  corrections  to  November, 
1913)." 

574.  Q.  Of  what  do  they  consist? 

A.  The  engages,  assaults,  simple  attacks,  attacks  on  the 
rifle,  feints  and  combined  movements. 

575.  Q.  What  is  a  "Chancery"? 

A.  An  attack  which  disarms  my  adversary,  or  causes  him 
to  lose  control  of  his  rifle,  or  which  disables  his  piece. 

576.  Q.  What  is  "Fencing  at  WUl"? 


BAYONET  COMBAT  93 

A.  When  two  men  are  to  fence  without  formal  commands 
it  is  called  ''fencing  at  will." 

577.  Q.  In  this  case  what  commands  are  given? 
A.  To  start.    1.  At  will  2.  Assault. 

To  interrupt.    Halt. 

To  end  the  match.  1.  Halt  2.  Salute. 

578.  Q.  Your  ability  to  fence  at  will  or  in  actual  combat  depends 

upon  what? 

A.  (a)  On  my  coolness. 

(b)  Quickness. 

(c)  Correctness  of  movements. 

(d)  Being  able  to  quickly  see  what  my  adversary  in- 
tends to  do. 

579.  Q.  Where  can  you  find  "Fencing  at  Will"  fully  explained? 
A.  On  pages  241,  242,  244  and  245,  "Infantry  Drill  Reg- 

ulations,  1911  (with  corrections  to  November,  1913)." 


CHAPTER  Vlir 
HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES 

580.  Q.  Why  should  a  soldier  know  something  about  the  history 

of  the  United  States? 
A.  Every  man  should  have  at  least  a  general  idea  of  how  his 
country  started,  its  principal  wars,  generals,  etc.    He 
should  know  what  people  are  talking  about  when  they 
speak  of  such  things. 

581.  Q.  Who  first  discovered  America? 

A.  Christopher  Columbus,  an  Italian. 

582.  Q.  When  was  this  discovery  made. 

A.  On  October  12, 1492,  Columbus  landed  from  his  ship  the 
''Santa  Maria"  on  the  island  of  San  Salvador,  one  of 
the  Bahama  Islands  which  are  to  the  southeast  of  the 
United  States. 

583.  Q.  Who  lived  here  before  the  United  States  was  discovered? 
A.  Different  tribes  of  Indians. 

584.  Q.  How  did  the  new  world  get  its  name? 

A.  It  was  named  America  after  an  Italian  named  Americus 
Vespucius  who  made  several  voyages  of  discovery  to 
this  land  in  the  years  1497  to  1499. 

585.  Q.  Where  was  the  first  permanent  English  colony  in  America? 
A.  At  Jamestown,  Virginia — in  1607. 

586.  Q.  Where  was  the  first  English  colony  in  New  England? 
A.  At  Plymouth,  Mass.,  in  1620 — these  people  landed  from 

the  ship  ''Mayflower''  on  the  Plymouth  Rock. 

587.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  the  ''Thirteen  Colonies." 

A.  As  the  eastern  shores  of  the  United  States  were  settled 
by  the  English  (New  York  by  the  Dutch)  the  land  was 
claimed  for  England  and  each  part  was  given  a  name  as 
follows: 

94 


588. 

Q. 

A, 

589. 

Q. 

A. 

590. 

Q. 

A. 

591. 

Q. 

A. 

592. 

Q. 

A. 

593. 

Q. 

A, 

594. 

Q. 

A. 

595. 

Q 

A, 

596. 

Q 

A. 

HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  95 

Virginia,  Massachusetts,  New  Hampshire,  New  York, 
Maryland,  Connecticut,  Rhode  Island,  Delaware, 
North  Carolina,  New  Jersey,  South  Carolina,  Pennsyl- 
vania and  Georgia.  These  were  known  as  the  thirteen 
original  colonies. 

When  were  they  settled? 

In  the  order  named  above  (except  New  York,  in  1614) 
during  the  years  1607  to  1733. 

How  long  did  the  colonies  belong  to  England? 

Until  the  signing  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence  on 
the  fourth  of  July,  1776. 

Why  is  the  Fourth  of  July  celebrated? 

Because  on  that  date  in  the  year  1776,  the  colonies  de- 
clared  themselves  free  and  independent  of  England 
and  they  have  remained  so  ever  since. 

How  did  the  colonies  manage  to  become  independent? 

They  helped  each  other  and  fought  the  War  of  the  Revo- 
lution which  they  finally  won  from  England.  France 
also  helped  the  colonies,  sending  troops,  ships,  and 
generals. 

How  long  did  this  war  last? 

From  the  Battle  of  Lexington,  April  19, 1775,  to  the  sur- 
render of  the  English  at  Yorktown  on  October  19, 1781 
— a  little  over  six  years. 

Who  was  the  leading  American  General? 

George  Washington. 

Name  some  of  the  well  known  battles  of  the  Revolution. 

Lexington,  Bunker  Hill,  Long  Island,  Trenton,  Saratoga, 
Monmouth,  Yorktown. 

What  caused  the  War  of  the  Revolution? 

England  did  not  treat  the  colonies  fairly — she  forced 
slaves  on  them,  taxed  them  unjustly,  interfered  with 
their  trade,  and  tried  to  take  their  land  from  them. 

What  were  the  results  of  the  War  of  the  Revolution? 

As  England  was  defeated  a  treaty  of  peace  was  signed  in 
1783.    It  admitted  that  the  colonies  were  now  in- 


96  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

dependent,  and  that  their  land  extended  from  Canada 
to  Florida  and  from  the  Atlantic  Ocean  west  to  the 
Mississippi  Riven 
The  colonies  bound  themselves  together  into  one  nation 
known  as  the  United  States  of  America. 
597.  Q.  Who  was  the  first  president  of  the  United  States? 

A.  George  Washington,  who  served  as  president  for  eight 
years  and  then  declined  to  serve  any  longer. 
698.  Q.  When  did  the  United  States  get  possession  of  most  of  the 
land  west  of  the  Mississippi  River? 
A.  In   1803 — ^by  purchase  from  France;  known  as  the 
Louisiana  Purchase. 

599.  Q.  What  was  the  next  war  in  the  United  States? 

A.  The  War  of  1812,  between  the  EngUsh  and  Americans. 

600.  Q.  How  long  did  this  war  last? 

A.  From  June  18, 1812  to  December  24, 1814 — two  and  one 
half  years. 

601.  Q.  What  caused  the  War  of  1812? 

A.  Interference  with  our  commerce  on  the  high  seas.  The 
English  claim  of  the  right  to  search  our  vessels  for 
EngHsh  subjects. 

602.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  well  known  happenings  during  this  war. 
A.  Hull's  Surrender,  Perry's  naval  victory  on  Lake  Erie, 

Sackett's  Harbor,  Chippewa,  Lundy's  Lane,  Platts- 
burg,  Bladensburg,  Capture  of  City  of  Washington, 
New  Orleans. 

603.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  more  noted  American  generals  in  this 

war. 

A.  Jacob  Brown,  Winfield  Scott  (later  in  Mexican  War), 
Andrew  Jackson  (later  President  of  the  United  States) 
— in  the  navy.  Perry  and  Macdonough. 

604.  Q.  What  were  the  results  of  this  war? 

A.  Nothing — although  England  stopped  searching  our  ves- 
sels she  would  probably  have  done  so  anyway  as  her 
troubles  in  Europe  were  over  and  she  no  longer  cared 
to  do  t^ii'". 


HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  97 

605.  Q.  What  branch  of  our  fighting  forces  was  the  most  successful 

m  this  war? 
A.  The  navy,  by  far. 

606.  Q.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  ^'Monroe  Doctrine"? 
A.  In  1823  President  Monroe  sent  a  message  to  Congress  in 

which  he  started  a  new  rule  for  the  American  people, 
as  follows:  That  North  and  South  America  are  not 
hereafter  to  be  colonized  (settled)  by  any  European 
nations;  that  any  attempt  to  do  so  will  be  considered 
an  unfriendly  act. 
This  rule  has  been  carried  out  ever  since, 

607.  Q.  What  was  the  next  war? 
A.  The  War  with  Mexico. 

608.  Q.  How  long  did  it  last? 

A.  From  May  13,  1846  to  February  2,  1848— nearly  two 
years. 

609.  Q.  What  was  the  cause  of  this  war? 

A.  Disputes  over  the  boundary  line  between  Mexico  and  the 
State  of  Texas. 

610.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  battles  in  this  war. 

A.  (a)  In  the  north  of  Mexico,  under  General  Taylor,  were 
fought  the  battles  of  Palo  Alto,  Resaca  de  la  Palma, 
Monterey  and  Buena  Vista, 
(b)  In  the  central  eastern  part  of  Mexico,  xmder  General 
Scott,  were  fought  the  battles  of  Cerro  Gordo,  Con- 
treras,  Churubusco,  San  Antonio,  Chapultepec  and 
the  City  of  Mexico. 

611.  Q.  Were  these  battles  successes  for  our  troops? 
A.  Yes — all  of  them. 

612.  Q.  What  were  the  results  of  this  war? 

A.  The  United  States  obtained  a  large  tract  of  land,  in- 
cluding California,  New  Mexico,  Utah,  Nevada, 
Arizona  and  parts  of  Wyoming  and  Colorado. 

613.  Q.  Name  three  great  statesmen  of  this  time. 
A.  Clay,  Webster  and  Calhoxm. 

614.  Q.  What  was  the  next  war? 


98  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  The  Civil  War  or  the  War  of  the  Rebellion. 

615.  Q.  How  long  did  it  last? 

A.  From  the  bombardment  of  Fort  Simiter,  by  the  Con- 
federates, April  12,  1861,  to  the  surrender  of  General 
R.  E.  Lee  to  General  Grant,  at  Appomattox  Court 
House,  April  9,  1865 — ^four  years. 

616.  Q.  What  were  the  causes  of  this  war? 

A.  Probably  the  great  difference  of  opinion  of  the  Northern 
and  Southern  people  of  the  United  States: 
,   The  North  did  not  believe  in  slavery. 
The  South  did  believe  in  slavery. 
The  North  believed  that  the  Nation  as  a  whole  should 

rule. 
The  South  believed  that  the  various  States  were  more 
powerful  in  themselves. 

617.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  well  known  battles  of  this  war. 

A.  First  Bull  Run,  Chancellorsville,  Second  Bull  Run, 
Fredericksburg,  Antietam,  Vicksburg,  Gettysburg, 
Chickamauga,  Chattanooga,  the  Wilderness,  Spottsyl- 
vania,  Atlanta  and  many  others. 
In  the  Navy— the  ''Monitor"  and  the  "Merrimac,'' 
Mobile  Bay. 

618.  Q.  Which  was  the  first  large  battle  in  this  war? 
A.  The  First  Bull  Run — a  Confederate  victory. 

619.  Q.  Which  is  considered  one  of  the  most  important  battles? 
A.  Gettysburg,   Pennsylvania,   as  here  the  Confederates 

under  General  Robert  E.  Lee  were  defeated  by  the 
Union  troops  under  General  George  G.  Meade,  and 
were  driven  back  into  their  own  territory  from  which 
they  were  never  again  strong  enough  to  try  an  invasion 
of  the  North;  had  the  Confederates  won  this  battle 
many  of  the  large  cities  of  the  North  would  have  fallen 
into  their  hands.  Up  to  this  time,  July,  1863,  the 
South  (Confederate)  had  usually  been  successful;  after 
this  they  commenced  to  lose  and  the  North  (Union) 
won  many  battles. 

620.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  generals  on  both  sides  in  the  Civil  War. 


HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  99 

A.  (a)  Union: 

McClellan,  Hooker,  Meade,  Burnside,  Grant,  Sherman, 

Sheridan,  Buell,  Thomas,  Rosecrans  and  many  others, 
(b)  Confederate: 
Robert  E.  Lee,  ''Stonewall"  (T.  J.)  Jackson,  Johnson, 

Hill,  Early,  Beauregard,  Longstreet,  Ewell,  Stuart  and 

others. 

621.  Q.  Which  was  the  most  noted  general  on  each  side? 
A.  Union — U.  S.  Grant. 

Confederate — R.  E.  Lee. 

622.  Q.  Who  was  President  of  the  United  States  during  this  War? 
A.  Abraham  Lincoln — ^he  was  assassinated  a  few  days  after 

the  close  of  the  war. 

623.  Q.  Who  was  President  of  the  Confederate  States  during  this 

war? 
A.  Jefferson  Davis. 

624.  Q.  What  were  some  of  the  results  of  the  Civil  War? 

A.  (a)  That  the  United  States  as  a  Nation  has  more  power 
than  any  one  State, 
(b)  No  more  slaves  in  the  United  States. 

625.  Q.  When  did  the  United  States  secure  Alaska? 
A.  In  1867,  by  purchase  from  Russia. 

626.  Q.  What  was  the  next  war? 
A.  The  war  with  Spain. 

627.  Q.  How  long  did  it  last? 

A.  From  April  25,  1898  to  August  12,  1898— about  foui 
months. 

628.  Q.    What  caused  this  war? 

A.  (a)  Improper  treatment  of  Cubans  by  the  Spanish. 

(b)  Continued  uprisings  in  Cuba. 

(c)  The  blowing  up  of  the  United  States  Battleship 
''Maine''  in  Havana  harbor  (in  Cuba),  on  February 
15,  1898. 

629.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  battles  and  occurrences  during  the 

Spanish- American  War. 
A*  Manila  Bay  (Admiral  Dewey,  Commanding  the  Navy), 


100  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

El  Caney,  San  Juan  Hill,  Destruction  of  Admiral 
Cervera's  Fleet,  Hobson's  exploit,  trip  of  the 
"Oregon/'  Capture  of  Manila. 

630.  Q.  Name  some  of  the  well  known  characters  of  history  in 

this  war. 

A.  Roosevelt,  Miles,  Schley,  Sampson,  Shafter,  Hobson.. 
Dewey,  Garcia,  Merritt,  Aguinaldo,  Funston. 

631.  Q.  What  were  the  results  of  this  war?" 

A.  (a)  Spain  gave  Cuba  its  independence. 

(b)  The  United  States  took  over  the  Philippine  Islands, 
Guam  and  Porto  Rico,  pajdng  for  them  the  sum  of 
$20,000,000. 

632.  Q.  How  and  when  did  the  different  parts  of  the  United 

States  come  into  its  possession? 

A.  (a)  The  original  13  States — during  the  War  of  the  Revo- 
lution, 1776. 

(b)  Louisiana  Purchase — from  France  in  1803.  (countr}^ 
west  of  the  Mississippi  River  and  east  of  the  Rocky 
Mountains). 

(c)  Florida — from  Spain,  in  1819. 

(d)  Texas — annexed  in  1845  (will  of  the  Texas  people). 

(e)  The  Oregon  territory — claim  established  in  1846. 
(Washington,  Oregon  and  Idaho.) 

(f)  California,  Nevada,  Utah,  Arizona,  parts  of  New 
Mexico,  Wyoming  and  Colorado — ^from  Mexico  in 
1848  (close  of  the  war). 

(g)  Gadsden  Purchase  (southern  strip  of  Arizona) — ^from 
Mexico  in  1853. 

(h)  Alaska  Purchase — from  Russia  in  1867. 

(i)  Philippine  Islands  and  Guam — ^from  Spain  in  1898 

(close  of  the  war), 
(k)  Porto  Rico — from  Spain  in  1898  (close  of  the  war). 
(1)  Hawaiian   Islands — annexed   in   1898    (request   of 

Hawaiian  Government), 
(m)   American  Samoa — by  International  Treaty,   in 

1899. 
(n)  Canal  Zone — ^from  Panama  in  1904. 


HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  101 

633.  Q.  How  can  you  learn  more  fuDy  about  t}i^.,hiitory  of  this 
country? 
A.  By  attending  Post  School  for  enlisted  men  or  by  getting 
hold  of  a  United  States  History  and  reading  it  my- 
self. 


CHAPTER  IX 

FIRING  REGULATIONS 

634.  Q.  What  is  an  anemometer? 

A.  An  instrument  which  measures  the  force  of  the  wind 
in  miles  per  hour. 

635.  Q.  What  is  the  battle  sight? 

A.  The  position  of  the  rear  sight  when  leaf  is  laid  down. 

636.  Q.  Up  to  what  ranges  is  it  used? 
A.  Up  to  547  yards. 

637.  Q.  What  is  the  bore  of  your  rifle,  pistol  or  revolver? 

A.  The  cylindrical  cavity  in  the  small  arms  barrel;  or 
the  inside  of  the  barrel  between  the  muzzle  and^the 
chamber. 

638.  Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  caliber? 

A,  The  distance  across  the  bore,  measured  between  the 
lands.     (Lands  are  the  raised  parts  of  the  rifling.) 

639.  Q.  What  is  the  caliber  of  your  rifle  measured  in  inches? 
A.  Thirty  hundredths — a  little  less  than  one-third  of  an 

inch. 

640.  Q.  What  is  the  caliber  of  your  pistol? 

A.  Forty-five  hundredths — or  a  little  less  than  one-half 
of  an  inch. 

641.  Q.  What  is  the  caliber  of  your  revolver  measured  in  inches? 
A.  Thirty-eight  hundredths — or  a  little  less  than  four- 
tenths  of  an  inch. 

642.  Q.  When  is  your  piece  canted? 

A.  My  piece  is  canted  when  I  devolve  the  barrel  to  the 
right  or  left  in  aimmg.  The  rear  sight  base  is  not 
then  horizontal  nor  the  front  sight  vertical. 

643.  Q.  What  is  a  coach? 

A.  A  special  instructor,  officer,  non-commissiohed  officer 

102 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  103 

or  private  charged  with  the  duty  of  giving  advice  to 
the  firer. 

644.  Q.  What  is  estimating  distance? 

A.  Judging  how  far  it  is  from  one  place  to  another;  each 
soldier  is  required  to  practice  this  and  to  be  tested 
in  it  before  shooting  on  the  range. 

645.  Q.  What  is  a  mirage? 

A.  Heat  waves  seen  on  the  target  range  on  warm  days. 

646.  Q.  What  is  a  ricochet  shot? 

A.  Bullets  which  strike  ground  or  other  objects  before 
hitting  target.    These  have  the  same  value  as  any 
other  hit. 
647,,  Q.  What  is  a  miss? 

A.  A  shot  at  the  target  which  does  not  strike  anywhere 
within  or  on  the  black  border  line  of  the  paper  target. 

648.  Q.  What  are  sighting  shots? 

A.  Trial  shots  fired  before  starting  the  score.  In  record 
firing  two  sighting  shots  are  fired  at  600  yards,  slow  fire. 

649.  Q.  What  is  a  trajectory? 

A.  The  path  of  the  bullet  through  the  air. 

650.  Q.  What  is  slow  fire? 

A.  Firing  with  small  arms  without  any  time  limit  laid 
down. 

651.  Q.  What  is  ''fire  at  will''? 

A.  The  kind  of  fire  in  which  each  soldier  fires  independ- 
ently of  the  others? 

652.  Q.  What  is  rapid  fire? 

A.  Firing  with  the  rifle  at  the  prone  figure  mounted  on 
a  disappearing  target.    A  tim.e  limit  is  given  you. 

653.  Q.  What  is  long  range? 
A.  800  to  1,200  yards. 

6547  Q.  What  is  mid-range? 

A.  500  to  800  yards. 
655.  Q.  What  is  short  range? 

A.  Up  to  500  yards. 


104  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

656.  Q.  What  is  gallery  practice? 

A.  Firing  at  reduced  ranges  with  the  22  caliber  rifle. 

657.  Q.  What  is  instruction  practice? 

A.  The  practice  I  have  on  the  range  before  I  shoot  for 
record. 

658.  Q.  What  is  record  practice? 

A.  The  practice  that  I  have  on  the  range  which  is  care- 
fully recorded  and  shows  any  progress  which  I  may 
have  made  and  the  class  to  which  I  belong,  2d,  1st, 
Marksman,  etc.,  and  for  which  extra  pay  is  allowed 
as  follows: 

Marksman $2.00    per  month 

Sharpshooter 3.00    per  month 

Expert  Rifleman 5.00    per  month 

659.  Q.  What  is  an  unqualified  man? 

A.  A  soldier  who  makes  less  than  152  points  out  of  300 
in  his  record  practice,  also  one  who  did  not  fire  the 
course. 

660.  Q.  What  is  a  2d  class  man? 

A.  A  soldier  who  makes  a  total  of  at  least  152  and  less 
than  177  points  in  firing  for  record  with  the  rifle. 
He  must  also  make  85  per  cent,  in  the  estimating 
distance  test. 

661.  Q.  What  is  a  1st  class  man? 

A.  A  soldier  who  makes  a  total  of  at  least  177  and  less 
than  202  points  in  firing  for  record  with  the  rifle. 
He  must  also  make  85  per  cent,  in  the  estimating 
distance  test. 

662.  Q.  What  is  a  Marksman? 

A.  One  who  makes  a  total  of  at  least  202  and  less  than 
238  points  in  firing  for  record  with  the  rifle.  He 
must  also  make  85  per  cent,  in  the  estimating  dis- 
tance test. 

663.  Q.  What  is  a  Sharpshooter? 

A.  One  who  makes  a  total  of  at  least  238  and  less  than 
253  points  in  firing  for  record  with  the  rifle.    He 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  105 

must  also  make  90  per  cent,  in  the  estimating  dis- 
tance test. 

664.  Q.  What  is  an  Expert  Rifleman? 

A.  One  who  makes  a  total  of  at  least  253  points  out  of  a 
possible  300  in  firing  for  record  with  the  rifle.  He 
must  also  make  90  per  cent,  in  the  estimating  dis- 
tance test. 

665.  Q.  What  is  a  centre? 

A.  When  a  shot  hits  within  the  four  ring  of  the  slow  fire 
target  it  is  sometimes  called  a  centre. 

666.  Q.  What  is  an  inner? 

A.  When  a  shot  hits  within  the  three  ring  of  the  slow 
fire  target  it  is  sometimes  called  an  inner. 

667.  Q.  What  is  an  outer? 

A.  When  a  shot  hits  within  the  two  ring  of  the  slow  fire 
target  it  is  sometimes  called  an  outer. 

668.  Q.  What  is  a  marking  disk? 

A.  A  stick  with  a  disk  at  each  end  used  by  a  soldier  de- 
tailed to  mark  targets  in  the  pit.  Each  disk  is  painted 
a  different  color  on  either  side  to  indicate  value? 
of  different  hits. 

669.  Q.  For  what  is  the  white  disk  used? 
A.  For  signaling  a  bull's-eye  or  five. 

670.  Q.  For  what  is  the  red  disk  used? 
A.  For  signaling  a  centre  or  four. 

671.  Q.  For  what  is  the  black  and  white  disk  used? 
A.  For  signaling  an  inner  or  three. 

672.  Q.  For  what  is  the  black  disk  used? 
A.  For  signaling  an  outer  or  two. 

673.  Q.  What  signals  are  made  with  the  red  flag? 

A.  (a)  A  miss,  when  waved  across  the  front  of  the  target. 

(b)  A  ricochet,  when  used  with  the  marking  disk. 

(c)  Danger,  when  placed  above  the  parapet  and  al- 
lowed to  remain  there. 

674L  Q-  What  i?  windag:e? 


106  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  The  amount  of  change  made  on  the  wind-gauge  of 
the  rear  sight  for  the  purpose  of  overcoming  the 
action  of  the  wind  on  the  bullet  after  it  leaves  the 
bore.  Spoken  of  as  ''two  points  right  wind,"  "a 
point  and  a  half  left/'  etc. 

675.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  9  o'clock  wind? 

A.  When  I  face  the  target  a  wind  blowing  directly  across 
the  range  from  the  left  is  called  a  9  o'clock  wind. 

676.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  3  o'clock  wind? 

A.  When  I  face  the  target  a  wind  blowing  directly  across 
the  range  from  the  right  is  called  a  3  o'clock  wind. 

677.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  6  o'clock  wind? 

A.  When  I  face  the  target  a  wind  blowing  directly  down 
the  range  toward  the  target  is  called  a  6  o'clock 
wind. 

678.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  a  12  o'clock  wind? 

A.  When  I  face  the  target  a  wind  blowing  directly  in  my 
face  from  the  target  is  called  a  12  o'clock  wind. 

679.  Q.  What  is  the  general  rule  for  designating  the  wind  by 

the  ''o'clock"  method? 

A.  I  imagine  myself  to  be  standing  at  the  centre  of  a  large 
clock  dial  with  the  12  o'clock  figure  (XII)  pointing 
directly  toward  the  target.  The  6  o'clock  (VI)  will 
then  be  at  my  back,  the  (IX)  at  my  left  and  the  (III) 
at  my  right. 

680.  Q.  Prom  where  will  a  2  o'clock  wind  come? 

A.  From  the  direction  of  the  (II)  on  the  clock  dial,  i.  e., 
from  the  right-front. 

681.  Q.  From  where  will  an  11  o'clock  wind  come? 

A.  From  the  direction  of  the  (XI)  on  the  clock  dial,  i.  e., 
from  the  left-front  and  almost  directly  in  my  face. 

682.  Q.  From  where  will  a  4  o'clock  wind  come? 

A.  From  the  direction  of  the  (IV)  on  the  clock  dial,  i.  e.j 
from  the  right-rear. 

683.  Q.  From  where  will  a  7  o'clock  wind  come? 


FIRING  REGULATIONS 


107 


A.  PYoni  the  direction  of  the  (VII)  on  the  clock  dial,  i.  e., 
from  the  left-rear. 

684.  Q.  How  does  one  read  the  wind-gauge  on  his  rifle? 

A.  (a)  If  for  right  windage,  read  spaces  between  the  two 
small  zeros  at  the  right  ends  of  the  graduated  arcs 
of  the  fixed  base  and  movable  base  of  the  rear  sight. 
CAUTION:  read  the  spaces  between  the  short  lines, 
not  the  lines  themselves. 
(b)  If  for  left  windage,  read  spaces  between  the  two 
small  zeros  at  the  left  ends  of  the  graduated  arcs 
of  the  fixed  base  and  movable  base  of  the  rear  sight. 
CAUTION:  read  the  spaces  between  the  lines  not  the 
lines  themselves. 

685.  Q.  How  much  windage  do  the  following  diagrams  rep- 

resent? 


^,         .Graduated  arc  of  mov- 
^'^   able  base  of  rear  sight. 

^*..*  ! Graduated  arc  of  fixed 
'base  of  rear  sight. 


Movable  base  protrudes  ^ 
here  for  left  windage.      -^^^ 


Movable  base  protrudes 
here  for  right  windage. 


A.  Figure  1  does  not  indicate  any  windage  as  zero  lines 
are  together  at  both  right  and  left  ends  of  arcs. 


108  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Figure  2  shows  two  points  left  windage  as  there  are 
two  spaces  between  the  two  zeros  at  the  left  ends 
of  ares,  where  movable  base  protrudes. 

A.  Figure  3  shows  four  points  right  windage  as  there  are 
four  spaces  between  the  two  zeros  at  right  ends  of 
arcs  where  movable  base  protrudes. 

686.  Q.  Why  should  you  become  a  good  shot? 

A.  Because  I  will  be  more  useful  in  time  of  war. 

687.  Q.  What  should  you  learn  first  for  target  practice? 

A.  I  should  know  the  principal  parts  of  my  rifle,  how  to 
care  for  same  and  how  to  prevent  accidents. 

688.  Q.  What  are  the  principal  parts  of  your  rifle? 
A.  (See  "Rifle  and  Equipment.") 

689.  Q.  How  should  it  be  cared  for? 
A.  (See  "Rifle  and  Equipment.'') 

690.  Q.  What  should  you  do  in  order  to  prevent  accidents? 

A.  Never  load  the  rifle  unless  ordered  or  until  I  am  at 
the  firing  point  and  it  is  my  turn  to  shoot. 

691.  Q.  If  the  piece  is  loaded  and  it  is  not  your  turn  to  fire 

what  should  you  be  careful  to  do? 

A.  Keep  the  bolt  open. 

692.  Q.  What  are  six  other  things  you  should  be  careful  not 

to  do  in  order  to  prevent  accidents? 

A.  (1)  Never  aim  down  the  target  range  when  the  targets 
are  not  in  sight  and  in  readiness  for  firing. 

(2)  I  should  never  under  any  circumstances  aim  at 
any  one,  no  matter  in  what  condition  my  gun  may 
be.    Many  an  "unloaded"  gun  has  killed  a  man. 

(3)  If  my  rifle  is  loaded  and  the  targets  are  not  ready 
I  should  see  that  the  safety  lock  is  turned  to  the 
right,  that  is,  at  the  "SAFE.''  I  should  be  care- 
ful never  to  turn  the  muzzle  in  the  direction  of  the 
other  men  on  the  firing  line. 

(4)  I  should  never  aim  at  the  targets  from  behind  the 
firing  line. 

(5)  If  I  wanted  to  practice  snapping,  I  should  get 


FIRING  REGULATIONS 


109 


up  on  the  firing  line,  preferably  off  on  one  of  the 
.flanks  out  of  the  way. 
(6)  In  unloading,  I  should  always  point  the  muzzle 
in  the  ground  a  short  distance  from  my  front  and 
away  from  all  other  persons. 

693.  Q.  In  target  practice  what  different  drills  are  you  re- 

quired to  take? 
A.  (1)  Nomenclature  and  care  of  the  rifle. 

(2)  Sighting  drills. 

(3)  Position  and  aiming  drills. 

(4)  Deflection  and  elevation  drills,  that  is,  practice 
in  setting  my  sights. 

(5)  Gallery  practice. 

(6)  Estimating  distance. 

(7)  Know  distance  firing  on  the  target  range  for  in- 
struction and  then  for  record. 

694.  Q.  If  any  point  comes  up  that  you  do  not  understand  in 

regard  to  shooting,  what  should  you  do? 
A.  Ask  an  experienced  shot  of  my  company  or  troop; 
I  should  not  trust  to  luck. 

695.  Q.  To  whom  are  the  sighting  drills  given? 

A.  To  all  soldiers  who  have  not  qualified  as  Marksmen 
or  better  during  the  preceding  target  year. 

696.  Q.  Of  what  use  are  sighting  drills? 

A.  They  explain  the  proper  use  of  the  sights  and  show 
how  errors  are  made  and  how  to  correct  them. 
697    Q.  Draw  a  picture  of  the  normal  sight  as  it  would  look 
to  you  if  enlarged  when  looking  through  the  sight 
at  a  bull's-eye. 


Fig.  4 


110 


THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 


698.  Q.  Draw  a  picture  of  the  correct  peep  sight  as  it  wiuld 
appear  to  you  if  enlarged  when  looking  through  the 
sights  at  a  bull's-eye. 


699.  Q. 
A. 


700.  Q. 
A. 


701.  Q. 
A. 


702. 

Q 

A. 

703. 

Q 

A 

704. 

Q 

Fig.  5 

Why  are  the  normal  sight  and  the  peep  sight  better 
than  all  others? 

Because  they  both  have  fixed  lines  upon  which  the 
same  amount  of  front  sight  can  be  easily  and  quickly 
taken  each  time. 

In  the  normal  sight,  what  is  the  fixed  line? 

The  line  formed  by  the  shoulders  on  either  side  of 
the  notch  in  the  open  sight,  on  the  rear  sight  drift 
slide.  The  tip  of  the  front  sight  should  appear  to 
be  even  with  this  line,  and  immediately  below  the 
buirs-eye. 

In  the  peep  sight  what  is  the  fixed  line? 

The  horizontal  line  crossing  the  centre  of  the  peep 
hole.  The  eye  will  generally  centre  the  tip  of  the 
front  sight  in  the  peep  naturally,  and  for  this  rea- 
son the  line  is  not  often  used. 

What  will  happen  if  you  take  too  much  front  sight? 

It  will  make  the  shot  strike  high. 

Taking  too  little  (known  as  too  fine)  front  sight  will 
have  what  effect? 

It  will  make  the  shot  strike  low. . 
Why  must  you  be  careful  to  sight  exactly  through  th^ 
centre  of  the  rear  sight  notch? 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  111 

A.  Because  sighting  through  the  left  of  the  notch  will 
throw  the  bullet  to  the  left  and  sighting  through  the 
right  will  throw  the  bullet  to  the  right  of  the  point 
at  which  I  am  aiming. 

705.  Q.  Why  must  you  be  careful  to  sight  exactly  over  the 

top  of  the  front  sight? 
A.  Because  sighting  over  the  left  of  the  front  sight  will 
throw  the  bullet  to  the  right  and  sighting  over  the 
right  of  the  front  sight  will  throw  the  bullet  to  the 
left  of  the  point  at  which  I  am  aiming. 

706.  Q.  Why  must  you  be  careful  not  to  cant  the  rifle  in  firing? 
A.  Because  canting  it  to  the  left  throws  the  bullet  to  the 

left  and  below  the  point  at  which  I  am  aiming;  and 
canting  it  to  the  right  throws  the  bullet  to  the  right 
and  below  the  point  at  which  I  am  aiming. 

707.  Q.  How  do  you  blacken  your  sights? 

A.  Light  a  candle  or  piece  of  camphor  and  hold  my  sights 
in  the  smoke  until  fully  blackened. 

708.  Q.  Should  you  always  blacken  your  sights  before  firing? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

709.  Q.  Why  do  you  blacken  your  sights? 

A.  It  prevents  the  sights  from  glistening  when  in  a  bright 
light,  and  makes  the  aim  more  distinct. 

Position  and  Aiming  Drills 

710.  Q.  Why  are  the  position  and  aiming  drills  valuable  to  you? 
A.  Because  they  teach  me  to  hold  my  piece  properly,  aim 

and  pull  the  trigger  properly;  they  also  harden  the 
muscles  of  my  arms,  all  of  which  is  necessary  if  I  am 
to  become  a  good  shot. 

711.  Q.  Who  should  take  these  position  and  aiming  drills? 
A.  Every  soldier  who  expects  to  become  a  good  shot. 

712.  Q.  Why  should  you  learn  to  do  the  aiming  exercise  exactly 

as  taught? 
A.  Because  without  doing  it  properly  I  cannot  become  a 
good  shot. 

713.  Q.  Describe  the  aiming  exercise. 


112  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  The  commands  are,  1.  Aiming.  2.  EXERCISE. 

(a)  With  rifle  in  position  of  ready,  at  the  command 
"exercise,"  without  moving  the  body  or  eyes,  raise 
the  rifle  smartly  to  the  front  of  the  right  shoulder  to 
the  full  extent  of  the  left  arm,  elbow  inclined  down- 
ward, the  barrel  nearly  horizontal,  muzzle  slightly 
depressed,  heel  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  the  top  of 
the  shoulder. 

(b)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  against  the  hollow  of  the 
shoulder,  without  allowing  the  shoulder  to  give  way, 
press  the  rifle  against  it  mostly  with  the  right  hand. 

(c)  Forefinger  of  the  right  hand  pressing  lightly  against 
the  trigger,  without  canting  the  rifle. 

At  the  count  "TWO'':  (d)  Bend  the  head  to  the  right, 

the  cheek  resting  against  the  stock,  being  careful 

not  to  get  the  nose  too  close  to  the  thumb, 
(e)  The  left  eye  closed,  the  right  looking  through  the 

notch  of  the  rear  sight  at  a  point  slightly  below  the 

mark. 
At   the   count    "THREE":  (f)  Draw   a   moderately 

long  breath,  let  a  portion  of  it  out,  then  holding  the 

breath, 
(g)  Slowly  raise  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand  being 

careful  not  to  cant  the  piece  until  sights  are  aligned 

just  below  the  mark, 
(h)  Hold  in  this  position  until  the  power  to  hold  piece 

steadily  is  almost  gone  then  resume  position  of  ready, 

and  resume  breathing. 

714.  Q.  What  should  you  be  careful  to  do  when  you  raise  the 

rifle  to  sight  through  the  notch? 
A.  I  must  be  careful  to  keep  my  eye  on  the  target  and  not 
on  the  front  sight. 

715.  Q.  Why  should  you  do  this? 

A.  If  I  fail  to  do  this,  when  I  shoot  at  the  long  ranges, 
the  mark  will  appear  blurred. 

716.  Q.  Why  should  you  be  careful  not  to  hold  the  breath  too 

long? 
A.  Be^9"^ip^,  J  get  sb^v.  and  mv  eyes  blur. 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  113 

TRIGGER  SQUEEZE 

717.  Q.  How  should  you  squeeze  the  trigger? 

A.  With  the  second  joint  of  the  forefinger,  first  taking  up 
the  slack,  then  squeezing  the  trigger  with  the  whole 
hand  as  you  would  squeeze  water  from  a  sponge. 

718.  Q.  Why  should  you  squeeze  the  trigger  in  this  manner? 
A.  Because  it  prevents  jerking  the  trigger  and  firing  be- 
fore I  am  ready. 

RAPID  FIRE  EXERCISE 

719.  Q.  What  is  the  object  of  rapid  fire  exercise? 

A.  To  teach  me  to  get  aim  quickly  and  correctly  in  all 
positions. 

USE  OF  SLING 

720.  Q.  Why  should  you  learn  to  adjust  the  sling  in  the  best 

way? 
A.  Because  it  helps  me  to  get  a  good  aim  and  keep  it. 

721.  Q.  Is  the  sHng  a  help  to  you  in  all  shooting  positions? 
A.  It  is  and  I  should  use  it  in  all  positions. 

722.  Q.  In  what  ways  only  can  you  use  your  sling? 
A.  (1)  I  can  use  the  sling  on  one  arm  only. 

(2)  Neither  end  shall  have  been  passed  through  either 
sling  swivels. 

(3)  No  knots  will  be  tied  in  the  gun  sling. 

(4)  The  sling  will  not  be  altered,  added  to  or  changed 
in  any  way. 

DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION 

723.  Q.  How  do  you  set  your  sights  for  battle  sight? 
A.  Have  rear  sight  leaf  down. 

724.  Q.  Show  your  normal  sight  set  at  600  yards. 

Show  your  normal  sight  set  at  750  yards. 
Show  your  normal  sight  set  at  975  yards. 

725.  Q.  Show  the  same  for  the  peep  sight. 

726.  Q.  Where  would  a  soldier  look  for  even  numbered  ranges 

on  his  rear  sicht  leaf? 


114  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  On  the  left-hand  side  of  leaf. 

727.  Q.  Where  would  he  look  for  odd  numbered  rangesT 
A.  On  the  right  side  of  leaf. 

728.  Q.  In  actually  setting  your  sights  where  should  you  look 

on  sight  leaf? 
A.  On  both  sides,  otherwise  I  am  Hable  to  take  too  much 
elevation. 

729.  Q.  If  the  wind  is  from  the  right  in  which  direction  would 

you  set  your  wind-gauge  to  correct  for  it? 
A.  To  the  right. 

730.  Q.  If  from  the  left  in  which  direction  would  you  set  your 

wind-gauge? 
A.  To  the  left. 

731.  Q.  What  rule  governs  this? 

A.  I  always  push  my  wind-gauge  in  direction  I  wish  bullet 
to  go. 

732.  Q.  How  can  you  know  how  much  windage  to  take? 

A.  I  will  be  told  by  the  instructor  until  I  am  a  good  shot, 
then  I  will  know  by  experience. 

733.  Q.  Set  your  wind-gauge  to  show  one  and  a  half  points 

right  windage. 

734.  Q.  Set  your  wind-gauge  to  show  two  and  a  half  points 

right  windage. 

735.  Q.  Show  the  same  for  a  left  wind. 

736.  Q.  Should  you  find  what  your  sight  setting  is  for  dif- 

ferent ranges,  for  your  particular  rifle? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

737.  Q.  Should  you  keep  a  record  of  this  and  where? 

A.  Yes,  sir,  in  my  score  book  or  other  convenient  place. 

738.  Q.  How  can  you  tell  which  way  the  wind  is  blowing? 
A.  By  looking  at  the  trees,  smoke  or  grass  near  me. 

GALLERY  PRACTICE 

739.  Q.  What  can  you  learn  at  gallerv  Dractice? 

A.  I  can  learn  how  to  hold  and  sight  properly. 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  115 

740.  Q.  What  is  one  important  thing  that  gallery  practice  will 

not  teach  you? 

A.  Whether  or  not  I  flinch  and  how  to  overcome  it. 

ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 

741.  Q.  Why  should  you  try  to  estimate  distance  correctly? 

A.  Because  it  may  be  necessary  in  time  of  war  for  me 
to  estimate  the  range  of  my  target. 

742.  Q.  What  is  the  length  of  your  pace? 

743.  Q.  How  many  of  your  paces  make  a  hundred  yards? 

744.  Q.  What  are  good  ways  to  estimate  distance  to  an  object? 
A.  (1)  By  comparing  the  distance  with  one  hundred  yards. 

(2)  To  divide  the  distance  in  half  and  compare  the 
half  with  one  hundred  yards. 

(3)  It  certainly  is  not  more  than  a  certain  distance, 
nor  is  it  less  than  a  certain  distance,  therefore  it  is 
between  the  two. 

(4)  Watching  for  the  dust  of  the  shot. 

745.  Q.  When  do  objects  seem  closer  to  you  than  they  really 

are? 

A.  (1)  When  they  are  down  hill. 

(2)  On  a  bright  day. 

(3)  Across  the  water,  snow  or  wheat  field. 

(4)  When  the  object  contrasts  sharply  with  the  back- 
ground, like  white  against  black. 

(5)  In  high  altitudes. 

746.  Q.  When  do  objects  seem  further  away  from  you  than 

they  really  are? 
A.  (1)  On  a  dark  or  foggy  day. 

(2)  When  up  hill  from  me. 

(3)  When  part  of  the  object  is  covered. 

(4)  When  looking  over  a  hollow  or  depression  in  the 
ground. 

SHOOTING  ON  THE  RANGE 

747.  Q.  Are  you  required  to  shoot  your  rifle  as  it  is  issued  to  you? 
A.  Yes.  except  that  my  company  commander  may  have 


116  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

the  front  sight  changed  or  the  wood  near  the  upper 
band  worked  down. 

748.  Q.  May  you  shoot  with  the  front  sight  cover  either  on  or  off  ? 
A.  Yes. 

749.  Q.  When  not  shooting  should  you  be  careful  to  keep  the 

front  sight  cover  on?    Why? 
A.  Yes,  because  it  protects  my  front  sight  from  injury. 

750.  Q.  When  not  shooting  should  you  be  careful  to  keep  your 

rifle  in  a  cloth  cover?    Why? 
A.  Yes,  because  my  rifle  is  then  protected  from  dust,  dirt 
and  dampness. 

751.  Q.  Should  you  be  careful  to  keep  the  muzzle  of  your  piect 

off  the  ground? 
A.  Yes. 

752.  Q.  In  what  uniform  should  you  always  appear  at  the  firing 

point? 
A.  In  the  uniform  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

753.  Q.  How  many  privates  work  and  mark  each  target  during 

target  practice? 
A.  Two. 

754.  Q.  What  do  these  two  privates  do? 

A.  One  works  targets  up  and  down  and  the  other  pastes  the 
holes  and  signals  the  shot  values. 

755.  Q.  When  should  I  leave  the  pit? 

A.  When  the  danger  flag  (red)  is  up  and  the  firing  ceases. 

756.  Q.  Should  I  ever  stick  my  head  above  the  parapet? 
A.  No,  sir. 

757.  Q.  When  should  you  lower  the  target? 

A.  Only  when  ordered  to  do  so  by  the  Corporal. 

758.  Q.  How  would  you  signal  a  miss  on  your  target? 
A.  By  waving  a  red  flag  across  the  front  of  target. 

759.  Q.  How  would  you  signal  a  ricochet  shot  that  hits  the  tar-. 

get? 
A.  By  showing  the  ricochet  flag  and  the  proper  disk  ovet 
the  shot  hole. 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  117 

760.  Q.  How  would  you  indicate  that  shots  were  going  over  your 

target  during  instruction  practice? 
A.  By  shoving  the  flag  up  and  down. 

761.  Q.  What  do  you  do  if  you  know  a  shot  has  missed  your  tar- 

get on  either  side? 
A.  Signal  a  miss  and  show  the  signal  on  the  side  missed. 

762.  Q.  How  do  you  show  a  shot  in  the  parapets? 

A.  The  miss  is  signalled  and  the  flag  is  moved  toward  the 
parapet  so  that  it  shows  the  shot  hit  in  the  parapet. 

763.  Q.  How  do  you  mark  rapid  fire? 

A.  (a)  Each  shot  hole  is  marked  in  order,  beginning  with 
the  highest  in  value. 

(b)  I  should  swing  the  disk  clear  of  the  target  for  each 
shot  marked. 

(c)  I  must  be  careful  to  mark  slowly,  so  that  the 
scorers  at  the  firing  point  can  read  the  score  cor- 
rectly. 

764.  Q.  How  are  misses  shown  in  rapid  fire? 

A.  By  waving  the  red  flag  once  across  the  target  for  each 
miss. 

RAPID  FIRE  PRACTICE 

765.  Q.  When  should  you  load  in  rapid  fire? 

A.  At  the  command  and  not  before  or  after. 

766.  Q.  What  sight  only  do  you  use  for  rapid  fire? 
A.  The  battle  sight. 

767.  Q.  How  do  you  load  for  rapid  fire? 

A.  Fill  my  magazine,  load  the  piece  from  the  magazine  and 
turn  my  safety  lock  to  the  ''  safe." 

768.  Q.  What  do  you  do  at  the  command,  "READY,"  by  the 

officer  in  charge  of  the  firing  line? 
A.  Turn  safety  lock  to  ready  and  take  position  of  ready, 
standing  with  sling  properly  adjusted. 

769.  Q.  What  do  you  do  in  case  you  are  not  ready  when  the 

officer  in  charge  of  the  firing  line  calls,  ''Ready  on  the 
right"  or  ''Ready  on  the  left"? 


118  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  I  call  ''Not  Ready/'  giving  the  number  of  my  target. 

770.  Q.  What  happens  if  you  do  not  call  "not  ready"  and  you 

fail  to  fire  at  the  target  at  the  proper  time? 
A.  tam  given  a  total  miss  for  the  score. 

771.  Q.  If  you  hear  the  command  "Ready  on  the  firing  line," 

where  must  you  keep  your  eyes? 
A.  On  my  target. 

772.  Q.  What  do  you  do  when  you  empty  your  magazine  in  rapid 

fire? 
A.  I  put  in  another  clip  and  continue  the  fire. 

773.  Q.  What  care  should  you  take  in  loading  the  second  clip? 
A.  I  should  load  as  follows:  Take  a  clip  from  the  belt  and 

insert  the  end  in  the  clip  slot,  placing  the  thumb  on  the 
powder  space  of  the  top  cartridge  and  the  fingers  ex- 
tending around  the  piece,  tips  resting  on  the  magazine 
floor  plate.  Force  the  cartridges  in  the  magazine  by 
pressing  down  with  the  thumb;  without  removing  the 
clip,  thrust  the  bolt  home,  and  turn  down  the  handle. 

774.  Q.  How  can  you  ruin  good  scores  by  carelessness  in  loading 

the  second  clip? 

A.  By  forcing  the  cartridges  out  of  the  clip.    They  fall  on 
the  ground  and  require  time  to  pick  up  and  load. 

775.  Q.  What  is  each  unfired  cartridge  counted  in  rapid  fire? 
A.  A  miss. 

776.  Q.  In  case  your  clip  breaks  or  jams  what  should  you  do? 
A.  Load  cartridges  singly  as  quickly  as  possible  and  con- 
tinue to  fire. 

777.  Q.  In  case  you  fire  on  the  wrong  target,  what  happens? 
A.  I  get  credit  for  such  shots  only  as  hit  my  own  target. 

778.  Q.  What  care  should  you  take  in  working  your  bolt  in  rapid 

fire? 
A.  (a)  To  pull  the  bolt  clear  back  in  order  that  the  fired 
shell  be  thrown  out. 
(b)  That  the  bolt  handle  is  clear  down  when  piece  is  re- 
loaded from  magazine. 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  119 

779.  Q.  What  is  flinching? 

A.  Flinching  is  a  sudden  movement  of  the  body  at  the  mo- 
ment of  firing,  throwing  your  rifle  out  of  aim;  another 
form  of  flinching  is  closing  the  eyes  at  the  moment  of 
firing. 

780.  Q.  What  causes  it? 

A.  Your  fear  of  the  recoil. 

781.  Q.  If  you  are  sure  that  you  have  made  a  good  score  and  they 

give  you  a  miss,  what  is  probably  the  cause? 
A.  I  have  probably  flinched. 

782.  Q.  How,  to  a  great  extent,  can  you  overcome  flinching? 
A.  By  aiming  properly,  and  holding  my  piece  steadily,  and 

squeezing  the  trigger  so  gradually  that  I  will  not  know 
the  exact  instant  the  shot  will  be  fired. 

783.  Q.  If  you  know  the  exact  moment  you  are  going  to  pull  the 

trigger,  what  will  happen? 
A.  I  will  probably  jerk  the  trigger,  flinch  or  both. 

784.  Q.  On  what  should  you  keep  your  mind  when  aiming? 
A.  On  the  aiming  and  not  on  pulHng  the  trigger. 

IMPORTANT   TO   REMEMBER 

1 .  That  the  greatest  cause  of  poor  scores  are: 

(a)  First  and  foremost,  flinching. 

(b)  Not  squeezing  the  trigger  properly. 

(c)  Not  holding  the   rifle   to   the  shoulder  closely 
enough. 

(d)  Not  holding  the  rifle  accurately  on  the  mark. 

(e)  Not  taking  full  value  of  sling. 

(f)  Not  getting  a  comfortable  position  before  firing. 

(g)  Not  holding  the  breath  properly. 

PISTOL    FIRING 

785.  Q.  What  are  the  three  principal  parts  of  your  pistol? 
A.  The  barrel,  slide  and  receiver. 

786.  Q.  How  do  you  clean  your  pistol? 

A,  S^in?  a§  fgr  rifle,    (See  ''Rifle  and  Equipment.") 


120  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM  • 

787.  Q.  In  taking  the  pistol  from  the  holster  or  rack,  what  pre- 

cautions should  you  take? 
A.  Remove  magazine  and  draw  back  slide  to  see  that  piece 
is  not  loaded.    Do  the  same  after  firing  on  target  range 
and  again  before  putting  pistol  back  in,  holster  or  rack. 

788.  Q.  What  are  the  ''don'ts"  in  pistol  practice? 

A.  (a)  Do  not  load  or  cock  pistol  imtil  ready  to  fire  or  imtil 
run  in  mounted  course  is  started. 

(b)  Always  keep  pistol  in  position  of  ''Raise  pistol"  ex- 
cept when  pointing  at  target. 

(c)  Never  place  the  pistol  on  the  ground  where  dirt  and 
sand  can  hurt  the  mechanism. 

789.  Q.  How  do  you  load  pistol? 
A.  FOR  LOADING  PISTOL: 

(a)  Place  five  cartridges  in  the  magazine  and  insert  mag- 
azine in  the  handle. 

(b)  Draw  back  the  slide  and  insert  the  first  cartridge  in 
the  chamber.  In  drawing  back  the  slide,  pull  to- 
ward] the  body  with  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left 
hand  until  it  stops  and  then  release  it. 

(c)  The  pistol  is  then  loaded  and  the  hammer  at  full 
cock. 

790.  Q.  Your  pistol  being  loaded  and  at  full  cock,  how  do  you 

lower  the  hammer? 
A.  (a)  Place  thumb  of  right  hand  firmly  on  the  hammer  and 
insert  forefinger  of  right  hand  in  trigger  guard. 

(b)  With  thumb  of  left  hand  exert  slight  pressure  on 
grip  safety  and  at  the  same  time  press  the  trigger. 

(c)  Lower  the  hammer  fully  down  with  thumb. 

791.  Q.  Should  you  ever  put  the  pistol  in  the  holster  with  ham- 

mer cocked? 
A.  No,  sir. 

792.  Q.  What  is  the  position  for  firing  dismounted? 

A.  (a)  Stand  firmly  on  both  feet. 

(b)  Body  perfectly  balanced  and  erect  and  turned  at 
such  an  angle  as  is  most  comfortable  when  the  arm 
is  extended  toward  the  target. 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  •   121 

(c)  The  feet  far  enough  apart  to  insure  firmness  and 
steadiness  of  position.     (About  8  or  10  inches.) 

(d)  Weight  of  body  resting  upon  both  feet. 

(e)  Right  arm  fully  extended,  or  nearly  so. 

(f )  Left  arm  hanging  naturally. 

793.  Q.  How  should  you  grip  the  pistol? 

A.  Firmly,  and  exactly  the  same  for  each  shot. 

794.  Q.  How  should  the  trigger  be  squeezed? 

A.  The  same  as  for  the  rifle,  with  the  whole  hand. 

795.  Q.  Why  is  the  pistol  harder  to  shoot  than  the  rifle? 
A.  Because  I  am  allowed  no  rests  or  gun  sling. 

796.  Q.  How  do  you  aim  in  pistol  shooting? 

A.  In  the  same  manner  as  with  the  rifle  (using  the  normal 
sight)  except  in  rapid  or  quick  fire  when  little  aim  can 
be  taken. 

797.  Q.  What  is  rapid  fire? 

A.  Firing  with  the  pistol  at  a  bull's  eye  pistol  target,  with 
time  limit  of  20  seconds  for  five  shots  (30  seconds  in 
expert  test). 

798.  Q.  How  do  you  aim  in  rapid  fire? 

A.  I  keep  my  eye  fixed  on  the  mark,  and,  after  each  shot  be- 
gin a  pressure  on  the  trigger  getting  off  the  next  shot  as 
nearly  perfect  as  I  can  in  the  time  allowed. 

799.  Q.  What  is  quick  fire? 

A.  Firing  with  the  pistol  at  the  bobbing  target. 

800.  Q.  How  do  you  aim  in  quick  fire? 

A.  I  practise  pointing  and  aiming  until  I  can  get  a  good  aim 
practically  without  the  use  of  the  sights. 

801.  Q.  Should  the  left  hand  be  used  in  pistol  practice? 
A.  Yes,  after  the  right  has  become  trained. 

802.  Q.  How  should  ''quick  fire''  be  executed? 

A    (i)  I  should  load  my  pistol  with  five  cartridges  (one  in 


122  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

chamber  and  four  in  magazine)  leaving  pistol  cocked 
and  at  the  ''safe''  (that  is,  locked  so  that  hammer 
cannot  fall). 

(b)  I  should  face  about  one  quarter  left  from  the  target 
with  weight  of  body  resting  equally  on  both  feet  and 
pistol  held  in  the  position  of  "raise  pistol." 

(c)  I  should  watch  closely  the  bobbing  staff  and  the 
instant  it  is  flipped  (the  target  exposed)  I  should  re- 
move the  "safe"  by  pressing  down  with  the  thumb 
and  take  quick  aim  at  the  figure  before  pulling  trigger. 

(d)  After  the  first  shot,  during  time  that  target  is  not 
exposed,  I  should  remain  in  the  position  of  "raise 
pistol"  (not  at  the  "safe"). 

(e)  I  should  fire  one  shot  at  each  reappearance  of  the 
target  until  five  shots  have  been  fired. 

803.  Q.  When  firing  is  it  necessary  to  squeeze  the  handle  of 

pistol  tightly  in  order  to  insure  its  proper  working? 

A.  Not  at  all — the  slightest  pressure  on  the  grip  will 
make  the  grip-safety  take  hold  and  therefore  you 
need  never  bother  about  this  point. 

804.  Q.  What  is  a  second  class  pistol  shot? 

A.  One  who  makes  at  least  72  and  less  than  96  points 
(60  per  cent.)  in  record  firing  with  the  pistol. 

805.  Q.  What  is  a  first  class  pistol  shot? 

A.  One  who  makes  at  least  96  points  out  of  a  120  (80  per 
cent.)  in  record  firing  with  the  pistol. 

806.  Q.  What  is  an  expert  pistol  shot? 

A.  One  who  makes  at  least  50  points  (83  per  cent.)  out  of 
a  possible  60  in  record  firing  with  the  pistol. 

PISTOL  RESUME 

There  are  two  kinds  of  pistol  shots,  the  natural  and  the  made 
shot.  The  former  with  comparatively  little  practise  can  soon 
do  good  shooting.  The  latter  must  be  willing  to  spend  a  great 
deal  of  time  at  snapping  at  marks  and  firing  with  small  caliber 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  123 

pistols.  The  22  caliber  with  6  inch  to  10  inch  barrel  is  recom- 
mended. When  proficiency  with  the  22  caliber^  slow  and  rapid, 
has  been  attained,  then  only  can  this  soldier  hope  to  manage 
Lccessfully  the  caliber  45  pistol.  As  with  the  rifle,  flinching 
will  be  found  to  be  the  greatest  evil  to  be  overcome.  Great 
patience  and  perseverance  will  be  required  both  by  the  soldier 
and  his  instructor. 

Designation  of  Targets  and  Fire  Distribution 

807.  Q.  In  firing  in  squad,  platoon  or  company  why  should  you 

always  aim  exactly  where  told  by  your  commander? 
A.  Because  it  is  a  part  of  the  team  work.  I  am  firing  at 
one  part  of  the  target  while  others  are  firing  at  the 
other  parts  of  the  target  and  in  this  way  the  whole 
target,  either  in  battle  exercise  or  in  real  war,  is  kept 
imder  our  fire. 

808.  Q.  Why  not  have  the  whole  company  fire  at  the  same  part 

of  the  target? 
A.  Because  that  would  take  the  fire  away  from  a  large  part 
of  the  target  (or  enemy)  and  in  war  would  leave  just 
that  many  of  the  enemy  free  to  fire  coolly  and  de- 
liberately at  us.  The  enemy's  fire  would  then  be 
much  more  accurate  and  deadly. 

809.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  ''designation  of  targets"? 
A.  The  pointing  out  of  targets. 

When  my  platoon  commander  tells  me  where  my  target 
is  and  at  what  part  I  am  to  fire  he  is  ''designating 
my  target." 

810.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  "fire  distribution"? 

A.  Aiming  and  firing  in  the  platoon  in  such  a  way  that 
every  point  of  the  platoon  target  is  under  fire. 
When  my  platoon  commander  has  told  us  all  at  what 
target  each  is  to  fire  and  has  assigned  us  so  that  all 
of  the  platoon  target  is  covered  by  our  fire  then  he 
has  distributed  his  fire.  If  we  all  fire  accurately  at 
our  proper  target  as  ordered,  he  has  good  "fire  dis- 
tribution." 

811.  Q.  Whose  duty  is  it  to  designate  your  target? 


124  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  My  platoon  commander;  he  may  be  assisted  by  platoon 
guides  and  squad  leaders. 

812.  Q.  How  should  your  target  be  designated  or  pointed  out 
if  it  can  he  dearly  seen  ? 

A.  My  platoon  commander  will  use  the  horizontal  dock 
system — that  is:  we  imagine  ourselves  to  be  in  the 
centre  of  a  very  large  clock  dial  which  is  lying  flat 
on  the  ground  with  the  XII  directly  in  our  front 
(perpendicular  to  our  firing  line).    He  will  then  give 

(a)  the  direction ...  for  example :  "at  two  o'clock  "  which 

means  we  look  in  the 
direction  of  the  II  on 
the  large  clock  dial. 

(b)  the  range. . .  .for  example:     ''range    iOOO"    which 

means  that  our  target 
is  about  a  thousand 
yards  from  us  and  we 
are  to  set  our  sights  at 
one  thousand. 

(c)  the  objective  or 

target for  example:  "a  troop  of  cavalry  dis- 
mounted" which  means 
our  target  will  be  this 
troop  of  cavalry  dis- 
mounted and  we  will 
open  fire  on  it  when 
given  the  command 
''fire  at  will.'' 
A  few  more  examples  of  pointing  out  targets  which  can 
he  clearly  seen: 

1.  (a)  at  eleven  o'clock  (b)  range  950  (c)  a  company  in 
column  of  squads. 

2.  (a)  at  one  o'clock  (b)  range  800  (c)  a  field  gun  in 
position. 

3.  (a)  at  ten  o'clock  (b)  range  1100  (c)  a  group  of  staff 
'  officers  mounted. 

Explain  to  your  instructor  just  what  each  of  the  three 
examples  means. 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  125 

813.  Q.  How  should  your  target  be  designated  or  pointed  out 
if  it  is  small  or  hard  to  see  ? 

A.  My  platoon  commander  will  then  use  the  vertical  clock 
system — that  is  (a)  we  imagine  ourselves  to  be  in 
tlhe  centra  of  a  very  large  clock  dial  which  lies  flat 
on  the  ground  with  the  XII  directly  in  our  front  as 
before  and  (b)  as  soon  as  the  platoon  cctfnmander 
gives  us  a  reference  point  (a  house,  tree  or  other  object 
near  our  target  but  easy  to  see)  we  imagine  another 
clock  dial  standing  upright  and  facing  us  with  its 
centre  at  this  reference  point,  (c)  Platoon  com- 
mander will  now  give  the  o'clock  or  direction  to  look 
from  the  centre  of  this  upright  clock  dial,  (d)  He 
will  then  give  the  range  (e)  and  then  the  target. 

For  example: 

Your  platoon  commander  wants  you  to  open  fire  on  a 
line  of  skirmishers  who  are  lying  down  to  our  left 
front  and  are  very  hard  to  see  as  the  range  is  900  yards. 
There  is  a  bushy  tree  about  100  yards  back  of  this 
line  and  to  their  left;  it  can  be  easily  seen  by  us.  Our 
platoon  commander  will  give  the  commands  like 
this:  (letters  in  front  of  these  commands  are  simply 
for  use  in  studying). 

(a)  ''To  our  left  front/'  (or  % 
"at  eleven  o'clock") which  means  we  look  in 

the  direction  of  eleven  on 
the  large  clock  dial  which 
lies  flat  on  the  ground. 

(b)  Reference  point which  means  we  are  to 

''A  bushy  tree"  use  this  as  our  reference 

point  for  the  centre  of 
our  upright  clock  dial. 

(c)  "At  eight  o'clock" which  means  we  are  to 

follow  from  this  bushy 
tree  or  the  reference  point 
in  the  eight  o'clock  di- 
rection in  order  to  find 
our  target. 


126  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

(d)  "Range  900'' which  means  the  line  of 

enemy  skirmishers  will  be 
found  900  yards  from  our 
position,  and  at  eight 
o'clock  from  the  bushy 
tree  reference  point.  We 
are  to  set  our  sights  at 
900. 

(e)  "A  line  of  skirmishers" .     which  means  our  target 

or  objective  will  be  this 
line  of  skirmishers  and 
we  are  to  open  fire  on  it 
when    given    the    com- 
mand ''fire  at  will." 
(Note:  the  platoon  commander  will  now  probably 
distribute  his  fire  by  telling  us  where  each  is  to  fire  on 
the  platoon  target;  as  a  usual  thing  he  will  give  to 
each  a  part  of  the  line  of  skirmishers  which  comes 
most  nearly  to  being  in  my  direct  front. 
A  few  more  examples  of  pointing  out  targets  which 
are  small  or  hard  to  see: 

1.  (a)  To  our  right  front  (b)  Reference  point  ''a  house 
with  two  chimneys"  (c)  at  3  o'clock  (d)  range  1000  (e) 
a  patrol  of  four  men. 

2.  (a)  at  2  o'clock  (b)  Reference  point  ''a  white  shack" 
(c)  at  9  o'clock  (d)  range  1100  (e)  a  squad  marching 
east. 

Note:  that  in  both  examples  the  first  command  refers 
to  the  horizontal  or  flat  clock  dial, 
that  in  both  examples  the  third  command  refers  to 
the  vertical  or  upright  clock  dial. 

Explain  to  your  instructor  just  what  both  of  these  ex- 
amples mean. 

814.  Q.  How  may  the  fingers  be  used  in  designating  or  pointing 
out  your  target? 

A.  My  platoon  commander  may  give  a  command  like  this: 

"To  our  right  front,  Reference  point  'a  stone  house 

with  two  chimneys,'  four  o'clock  three  fingers,  range 


FIRING  REGULATIONS  127 

1000,  a  skirmish  line  alongside  that  fence  length 
about  two  fingers,  right  at  the  dark  bush." 

Which  will  mean  that  we  find  our  reference  point  (stone 
house  with  two  chimneys)  as  explained  in  the  vertical 
clock  system  and  from  this  reference  point  and  in 
the  four  o'clock  direction  a  width  equal  to  three 
fingers  we  should  find  the  right  or  nearest  point  of 
the  skirmish  line,  one  thousand  yards  away.  The 
length  of  skirmish  line  is  about  two  fingers  which 
would  bring  the  left  of  skirmish  line  two  fingers  farther 
to  our  right. 

In  other  words  he  has  used  his  fingers  to  show  how 
far  from  the  reference  point  (stone  house  with  two 
chimneys)  we  are  to  look  for  the  nearest  part  of  the 
target  (three  fingers)  and  he  has  again  used  his  fingers 
to  show  how  wide  the  target  is  (two  fingers). 

815.  Q.  How  should  the  fingers  be  used  in  pointing  out  the 

target? 
A.  The  arm  is  extended  to  its  full  extent,  palm  of  the  hand 
onwards,  fingers  held  vertically  (upright)  with  one 
side  of  the  hand  against  the  reference  point. 

816.  Q.  When  may  it  be  necessary  for  you  to  aim  at  one  object 

with  the  idea  of  hitting  another? 
A.  When  the  real  target  is  very  hard  to  see  (or  out  of  sight), 
but  there  is  a  good  aiming  point  near  by.  In  this 
case  I  may  be  required  to  aim  and  fire  at  the  good 
aiming  point  but  to  use  such  windage  and  elevation 
as  will  throw  my  bullets  into  the  real  target.  Only 
by  following  strictly  the  orders  of  the  platoon  com- 
mander as  to  sightsetting,  etc.,  will  my  shots  go  where 
intended. 


CHAPTER  X. 

FIRST  AID 

First  Aid  to  Wounds 

An  attempt  has  been  made  to  formulate  these  questions  and  answers  in 
as  simple  language  as  possible  so  the  average  soldier  can  understand  them, 
and  no  attempt  has  been  made  to  follow  grammatical  or  technical  rules  if 
the  idea  could  be  conveyed  in  a  simpler  form  that  the  soldier  would  under- 
stand. These  questions  are  not  to  be  used  in  the  place  of  instructions  by 
the  Company  Commanders  on  the  subjects  covered,  but  are  simply  to  be 
used  as  an  aid  to  the  enlisted  man  in  getting  a  better  understanding  of  the 
subject  when  taken  up  by  his  instructors. 

817.  Q.  Of  what  does  the  first  aid  treatment  of  wounds  consist? 
A.  (a)  The  arrest  of  hemorrhage.     (Stopping  bleeding.) 

(b)  The  prevention  of  infection.     (Keeping  dirt  out  of 
wound.) 

(c)  The  treatment  of  shock. 

ARREST  OF  HEMORRHAGE 

818.  Q.  How  is  the  blood  carried  to  the  different  parts  of  the 

body? 
A.  By  the  blood  vessels,  just  as  the  water  is  carried  to  the 
different  parts  of  the  post  by  the  water  pipes  of  the 
water  system  of  the  post. 

819.  Q.  How  many  kinds  of  blood  vessels  have  you,  and  what 

does  each  do? 

A.  Three. 

(a)  Arteries,  carrying  the  blood  from  the  heart  to  the 
different  parts  of  the  body. 

(b)  Veins,  carrying  the  blood  from  the  different  parts  of 
the  body  to  the  heart. 

(c)  Capillaries,    very    small    vessels    connecting    the 
arteries  and  the  veins.    See  picture  No.  1. 

820.  Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  hemorrhage? 


No.  1 

The  heavy  black  lines  represent  the  arteries.  Paralleling  each  of  these  heavy  black  lines  is 
another  black  line  that  represents  the  veins.  The  small  lines  connecting  the  heavy  lines  rep- 
resent the  capillaries. 

1  is  the  heart,  the  right  side  receiving  the  venous  blood  through  the  veins,  the  left  side  send- 
ing the  arterial  blood  out  through  the  arteries. 

2  is  the  large  artery  that  carries  the  blood  to  the  arms  and  is  found  under  the  collar  bone 
as  shown  in  picture. 


FIRST  AID  129 

A.  When  any  part  of  the  body  is  injured,  as  by  a  cut  or  a 
bullet  wound,  the  walls  of  some  of  these  vessels  are 
broken,  allowing  the  blood  to  flow  out  of  the  vessels  in- 
stead of  being  carried  along  in  them.  Hemorrhage. is 
the  escape  of  the  blood  from  the  blood  vessels  through 
a  break  in  their  walls. 

821.  Q.  What  kind  of  hemorrhage  may  follow  an  injury? 

A.  (a)  Arterial,  when  the  walls  of  an  artery  are  broken. 

(b)  Venous,  when  the  walls  of  a  vein  are  broken. 

(c)  Capillary,  when  the  walls  of  a  capillary  are  broken. 

822.  Q.  How  could  you  tell  by  looking  at  a  wound  which  of 

these  vessels  had  been  broken? 
A.  (a)  If  an  artery  has  been  cut  the  blood  flows  out  of  the 
wound  in  spurts  and  the  blood  is  bright  red. 

(b)  If  a  vein  has  been  cut  the  blood  flows  out  of  the 
wound  in  a  steady  stream  and  the  blood  is  dark  red. 

(c)  If  capillaries  are  cut  the  blood  simply  oozes  out  of  the 
wound  and  does  not  flow  in  a  steady  stream. 

823.  Q.  How  would  you  stop  the  hemorrhage  if  you  decided  it 

was  from  an  artery? 
A.  By  putting  on  a  tourniquet  between  the  wound  and  the 
heart. 

824.  Q.  What  is  a  tourniquet? 

A.  A  pad  or  compress  placed  on  the  line  of  the  artery  and  a 
strap  or  band  to  go  over  the'pad  and  around  the  limb  so 
that  when  it  is  tightened  it  will  press  the  pad  down 
upon  the  artery  and  interrupt  the  flow  of  blood. 

825.  Q.  What  may  be  used  as  a  pad  for  the  tourniquet? 

A.  A  cork,  a  smooth  round  stone,  a  piece  of  wood  or  a  coat 
button  wrapped  in  something  like  a  handkerchief  to 
make  it  softer. 

826.  Q.  What  may  be  used  as  the  band  for  the  tourniquet? 

A.  Your  waist  belt,  handkerchief,  hat  cord  or  a  piece  of 
rope.    See  picture  No.  2. 

827.  Q.  How  is  the  tourniquet  tightened? 
A.  (a)  Tie  the  band  around  the  limb. 


130  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

(b)  Place  the  pad  under  the  band  and  over  the  artery 
where  you  want  to  make  pressure. 

(c)  Pass  a  stick  under  the  band  and  twist  until  the  flow 
of  blood  stops. 

(d)  Hold  in  this  position  by  catching  one  end  of  the  stick 
under  the  band. 

828.  Q.  In  what  way  may  harm  be  done  in  using  the  tourniquet? 
A.  (a)  By  bruising  the  flesh  and  muscles  by  twisting  the 

band  too  tightly, 
(b)  By  leaving  the  pressure  on  too  long. 

829.  Q.  When  and  how  would  you  loosen  the  tourniquet? 

A.  After  about  half  an  hour  untwist  the  stick  slowly  and 
watch  the  wound  for  return  of  the  hemorrhage;  then 
leave  band  and  pad  in  place  so  it  may  be  tightened 
again  if  hemorrhage  returns. 

830.  Q.  How  would  you  stop  the  hemorrhage  if  it  is  from  a  vein? 

A.  (a)  Place  gauze  pad  in  first  aid  packet  over  the  wound 
and  then  wind  the  bandage  tightly  around  the  limb 
over  the  gauze  pad. 

(b)  Then  raise  the  limb  above  the  rest  of  the  body. 
See  picture  No.  3. 

(c)  If  it  still  bleeds  put  tourniquet  on  the  side  of  the 
wound  farthest  from  the  heart. 

831.  Q.  If  it  is  from  the  capillaries? 

A.  By  placing  the  gauze  pad  in  the  first  aid  packet  over 
the  wound  and  then  wind  the  bandage  tightly  around 
the  limb  over  the  gauze  pad. 

832.  Q.  How  does  making  pressure  between  the  wound  and  the 

heart  stop  hemorrhage  from  an  artery? 

A.  By  pressing  the  artery  against  the  bone  so  that  the  blood 
cannot  pass  through  the  artery  and  out  of  the  wound. 

833.  Q.  Where  would  you  make  pressure  if  the  bleeding  is  from 

the  side  of  the  head? 
A,  In  front  of  the  ear  just  below  the  edge  of  the  hair  on  the 
same  side  as  the  wound.    See  picture  No,  4, 

834e  Q.  If  frgm  tb^  arm  ^bgye  the  elbow? 


No.  2 
1  is  the  line  of  the  artery.    2  is  the  pad  placed  on  line  of  artery;  in  this  case  folded  hand- 
kerchief and  match  box  have  been  used  for  a  pad.     3  is  the  band;  in  this  case  the  belt  has 
been  used.     4  is  the  stick  to  tighten  the  band;  in  this  case  a  pen  holder  has  been  used.     5  is 
the  wound. 


No.  6 
1  is  the  wound.     2  is  the  line  of  the  artery. 

3  is  the  pad  of  the  tourniquet  in  this  case  a 
handkerchief  and   blouse  button  were  used. 

4  is  the  band  of  the  tourniquet,  in  this  case 
the  hat  cord  was  used.  5  is  the  stick  to  tighten 
the  band;  in  this  case  the  knife  from  the  mess 
kit  was  used. 


No.  7 

1  is  pad  behind  knee. 

2  is  belt  passed  around  ankle  and  thigh. 

3  is  the  wound. 


FIRST  AID  131 

A.  Along  the  inner  edge  of  the  big  muscle  on  the  front  of 
the  arm,  above  the  wound.    See  picture  No.  2. 

835.  Q.  If  from  the  arm  below  the  elbow  or  from  the  hand? 

A.  Same  as  last  answer;  or  by  placing  a  pad  in  front  of  the 
elbow  then  placing  the  hand  on  the  shoulder  of  the 
same  side  by  bending  the  elbow;  hold  arm  in  that 
position  by  passing  a  belt  around  the  wrist  and 
around  the  arm  just  below  the  shoulder.  See  picture 
No.  5. 

836.  Q.  If  from  between  the  hip  and  the  knee? 

A.  The  middle  of  the  groin  a  few  inches  to  the  outside  of  the 
crotch,  above  the  wound.    See  picture  No.  6. 

837.  Q.  If  from  below  the  knee  or  from  the  foot? 

A.  Same  as  last  answer;  or  by  placing  a  pad  behind  the  knee 
and  bending  knee  back  until  the  heel  almost  touches 
the  buttock;  hold  the  leg  in  that  position  by  passing  a 
belt  around  the  ankle  and  around  the  thigh  just  below 
the  hip.    See  picture  No.  7. 

838.  Q.  How  would  you  stop  bleeding  from  the  arge  artery  in 

the  front  of  the  neck? 
A.  By  making  pressure  with  the  thumbs  below  the  wound 
and  along  the  big  muscle  of  the  neck  that  comes  down 
to  the  breast  bone.    See  picture  No.  8. 

839.  Q.  How  would  you  stop  bleeding  from  the  large  artery  in  the 

arm  pit? 
A.  By  placing  the  thumb  or  finger  on  the  artery  in  the  space 
above  the  collar  bone  and  pressing  down  behind  the 
collar  bone  until  your  thumb  or  finger  feels  the  bone 
underneath  the  collar  bone.    See  picture  No.  9. 

Prevention  and  Infection 
use  of  the  first  aid  packet 

840.  Q.  Where  is  the  first  aid  packet  carried? 

A.  In  front  of  the  right  hip  under  the  second  pocket  of  the 
field  belt.  If  armed  with  a  pistol,  in  front  of  the  left 
hip. 


132  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

841.  Q.  How  should  the  packet  be  placed  in  the  pouch? 
A.  With  the  ring  down. 

842.  Q.  Why? 

A.  If  placed  with  the  ring  up,  a  soldier  in  removing  it  will 
pull  on  the  ring,  either  pulling  off  the  metal  ring  or 
opening  the  metal  container,  thereby  allowing  dirt  to 
get  into  the  packet  thus  rendering  it  unserviceable. 

843.  Q.  Who  carries  the  first  aid  packet? 
A.  Every  soldier  in  the  army. 

844.  Q.  What  does  the  first  aid  packet  contain? 

A.  Two  gauze  pads  and  bandages,  two  safety  pins,  and 
printed  directions  for  using  packet. 

845.  Q.  How  do  you  open  the  first  aid  packet? 
A.  By  pulling  on  the  ring. 

846.  Q.  What  do  you  find  when  you  open  the  first  aid  packet? 
A.  One  large  package  which  contains  three  smaller  packages. 

847.  Q.  What  is  in  the  smaller  packages? 

A.  A  sterile  gauze  pad  and  bandage  in  two  of  them  andsafety 
pins  in  the  smaller  one.    See  picture  No.  10. 

848.  Q.  How  would  you  apply  the  first  aid  packet  to  a  wound? 
A.  (a)  Open  the  packet  by  pulling  on  the  ring. 

(b)  Break  the  wax  paper  around  one  of  the  gauze  pads 
and  bandages. 

(c)  Pick  up  the  rolls  of  the  bandage  with  the  thumb  and 
forefinger  of  each  hand. 

(d)  Pull  gently  with  each  hand  until  the  gauze  pad  opens 
out. 

(e)  Place  this  gauze  pad  over  the  wound.  See  picture 
No.  11. 

(f )  Unroll  the  bandage  slowly  from  each  side,  winding  it 
around  the  part  so  as  to  completely  cover  the  gauze 
pad  and  hold  it  in  place. 

(g)  When  the  ends  of  the  bandage  are  reached,  pin  with 
the  safety  pins  or  tie. 

849.  Q.  What  is  meant  by  saying  the  gauze  pads  and  bandage  are 

sterile? 


No.  3 

1  is  the  first  aid  packet  applied  over  wound. 
2  is  arm  held  above  rest  of  body. 


No.  4 


No.  5 
1  is  pad  in  front  of  elbow.     2  is  belt  around  1  is  the  wound, 

wrist  and  arm  to  hold  hand  on  shoulder.    3  is       pressure, 
end  of  belt  tucked  under  shirt. 


No.  8 
2  is  the  place  to  make 


FIRST  AID  133 

A.  They  have  been  treated  with  heat  or  some  chemical  so 
that  all  germs  have  been  killed. 

850.  Q.  Why  is  this  done? 

A.  So  that  when  the  gauze  pad  is  put  on  the  wound  no 
germs  will  get  in  the  wound  from  the  dressing. 

851.  Q.  ^What  four  things  should  you  remember  in  putting  on  the 

dressing? 
A.  (a)  That  nothing  whatever,  not  even  your  fingers,  be 
allowed  to  touch  the  gauze  pad  which  is  placed 
against  the  wound. 

(b)  That  nothing  whatever  is  allowed  to  touch  the 
wound. 

(c)  That  the  bandage  should  be  put  on  so  as  to  cover 
both  ends  of  the  gauze  pad,  thus  preventing  in- 
fection (dirt)  from  getting  under  the  dressing  when 
the  wounded  man  is  moved. 

(d)  That  the  bandage  is  put  on  tightly  enough  to  hold 
the  gauze  pad  over  the  wound,  but  not  so  tightly 
as  to  shut  off  the  circulation  of  the  blood. 

852.  Q.  How  would  you  know  the  bandage  was  too  tight? 

A.  The  part  beyond  the  bandage  (farthest  from  the  heart) 
would  become  swollen,  the  veins  large,  color  dark  and 
later  may  become  cold;  also  the  wounded  man  would 
probably  complain  of  increasing  pain.  See  picture 
No.  12. 

853.  Q.  Suppose  the  wound  was  larger  than  the  gauze  pad  what 

would  you  do? 
A.  At  the  top  of  the  gauze  pad  will  be  found  two  threads; 
break  these  and  you  will  have  a  pad  three  and  a  half 
by  seven  inches. 

854.  Q.  Suppose  there  were  two  wounds? 

A.  Apply  the  gauze  pad  and  bandage  in  the  other  package 
the  same  as  you  have  applied  this  one. 

855.  Q.  Why  is  it  necessary  to  be  so  careful  not  to  touch  the 

wound  or  the  gauze  pad  that  you  intend  to  place  on 
the  wound? 
A.  (a)  The  hands,  the  clothing  and  everything  that  has 


134  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

not  been  sterilized  are  covered  with  hundreds  of 
germs  which  are  so  small  they  can  not  be  seen  with 
the  naked  eye. 
(b)  By  touching  the  wound  or  the  pad  that  is  to  be 
placed  over  it  these  germs  are  left  in  the  wound  or 
on  the  pad  and  from  it  they  get  into  the  wound. 

856.  Q.  What  may  result  if  these  germs  do  get  in  the  wound? 
A.  Pus  may  form  or  there  may  develop  ''blood  poisoning," 

lock-jaw,  or  erysipelas,  depending  upon  the  kind  of 
germs  that  are  carried  into  the  wound. 

857.  Q.  What  is  an  infected  wound? 

A.  One  that  germs  have  gotten  into. 

858.  Q.  How  may  these  germs  get  into  the  wound? 

A.  (a)  By  touching  the  wound  with  dirty  hands  or  dirty 
dressings, 
(b)  By  having  a  dirty  body  and  dirty  clothing. 

859.  Q.  How  may  a  soldier  prevent  a  wound  from  becom- 

ing infected? 
A.  (a)  By  keeping  his  body  and  underwear  clean. 

(b)  By  keeping  dirt  out  of  the  wound. 

(c)  By  putting  on  the  first  aid  dressing  properly. 

Treatment  of  Shock 

860.  Q.  What  is  shock? 

A.  It  is  a  condition  that  results  when  a  man  has  received 
a  severe  injury  or  has  lost  a  large  amount  of  blood. 

861.  Q.  What  do  you  know  about  the  treatment  of  shock? 

A.  It  is  such  a  serious  condition  that  a  private  soldier 
should  not  attempt  to  treat  it  but  a  medical  officer 
should  be  called  at  once. 

First  Aid  in  Sprains  and  Fractures 

862.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  sprained  your  ankle  or  wrist? 
A.  (a)  Put  hand  or  foot  in  bucket  of  cold  water  at  once. 

(b)  Keep  adding  cold  water;  ice  water  is  better. 

(c)  Keep  it  in  this  water  for  about  a  half -hour. 

(d)  Bandage  tightly  and  report  to  medical  officer. 


No.  9  No.  11 

1  is  the  wound.    2  is  the  collar  bone.    3  is  1  is  the  wound.     2a  and  2b  sterile  bandage, 

the  place  to  make  pressure.  3  is  sterile  gauze  pad. 

Note  how  he  has  picked  up  each  bandage  with  thumb  and  forefinger  without  touching  pad. 


No.  12 
1  is  first  aid  packet  applied^to  wound  near 
elbow.     2  shows  enlarged    veins   caused  by 
bandage  being  too  tight. 

No.  10 
1  is  first  aid  packet  with  metal  container. 
2  is  package  found  after  metal  container  is  re- 


No.  10 
moved.  3a,  3b,  3c,  3d,  are  what  is  found  when 
large  package  is  opened.  3a  and  3b  each  con- 
tain a  sterile  gauze  pad  and  bandage.  3c  con- 
tains two  safety  pins.  3d  is  printed  directions 
for  using  packet.  4  is  safety  pins  ojjened.  5  is 
sterile  pad  contained  in  3a  and  3b.  6  is  sterile 
bandage  contained  in  3a  and  3b. 


FIRST  AID  135 

863.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  thought  a  man  had  a  broken 

bone? 

A.  (a)  See  that  the  injured  Hmb  is  not  moved  more  than 
is  absolutely  necessary. 

(b)  Place  the  limb  in  as  near  the  natural  position  as 
possible. 

(c)  Put  on  splints  so  as  to  hold  it  in  that  position. 

864.  Q.  What  are  the  dangers  from  moving  a  broken  limb  be- 

fore splints  are  put  on? 
A.  In  moving  the  limb,  the  sharp  ends  of  the  bone  may 
tear  the  muscles  or  a  blood  vessel,  or  may  break 
through  the  skin. 

865.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  the  bone  had  broken  through 

the  skin? 

A.  First  put  on  a  first  aid  packet  and  then  apply  splints 
the  same  as  for  any  other  broken  bone. 

866.  Q.  What  could  be  used  for  splints? 

A.  Pieces  of  board,  sticks  cut  from  trees  or  anything  that 
is  strong  enough  to  hold  the  limb  so  it  can  not  move. 

867.  Q.  What  must  you  always  be  careful  to  do  in  putting  on 

splints? 

A.  (a)  Pad  the  splints  so  they  will  not  cause  pain  by  pres- 
sure. 

(b)  Put  splints  on  tight  enough  so  there  can  be  no  move- 
ment of  the  broken  ends  of  the  bone  when  the  man 
is  moved. 

(c)  Have  the  splints  long  enough  so  as  to  prevent,  as 
much  as  possible,  movement  of  the  joint  above  and 
the  joint  below  the  break. 

868.  Q.  What  could  be  used  for  padding? 

A.  Parts  of  the  man's  clothing,  paper,  grass,  leaves. 

869.  Q.  What  could  you  use  to  hold  the  splints  in  position? 

A.  Handkerchiefs,  waist  belts,  bandages,  ropes,  hat  cords, 
leggin  strings,  shoe  strings  or  straps.  Put  these  on 
above  and  below  the  break  and  never  immediately- 
over  it. 


136  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

870.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  a  man  had  a  broken  arm  between 

the  shoulder  and  elbow? 
A.  Put  splints  on  outside  of  arm  from  shoulder  to  elbow; 
another  on  inside  of  arm  from  arm  pit  to  elbow; 
place  arm  across  chest  so  that  the  thumb  points  up 
and  hold  in  a  sling.    See  pictures  13, 15,  and  16. 

871.  Q.  If  between  the  wrist  and  elbow? 

A.  Splint  on  outside  of  arm  from  elbow  to  ends  of  fingers; 
splint  on  inside  of  arm  from  elbow  to  ends  of  fingers; 
put  in  sling  as  shown  in  pictures  15  and  16,  also  see 
picture  14. 

872.  Q.  What  could  you  use  for  a  sling? 

A.  Two  handkerchiefs  tied  together,  lower  part  of  blouse 
or  shirt  turned  up  and  pinned  high  enough  to  hold 
arm  across  chest,  or  use  a  belt.  See  pictures  15  and 
16. 

873.  Q.  If  between  the  knee  and  the  ankle? 

A.  Splints  on  inside,  outside,  and  behind  from  above  knee 
to  sole  of  foot;  then  tie  the  legs  together.  See  pic- 
tures 17  and  18. 

874.  Q.  If  between  the  hip  and  the  knee? 

A.  Long  splint  on  outside  of  leg  from  armpit  to  sole  of 
foot;  short  splint  inside  of  and  behind  leg  from  crotch 
to  sole  of  foot,  then  tie  legs  together.  See  picture 
No.  19. 

875.  Q.  If  collar  bone  is  broken? 

A.  No  splints  needed,  but  put  arm  in  sUng  same  as  for  a 
broken  bone. 

First  Aid  in  Drowning 

876.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  things  to  remember  if  you  are  a 

poor  swimmer  and  find  yourself  in  deep  water? 

A.  (a)  Do  not  make  violent  strokes  with  your  arms  and 
legs,  as  this  only  tires  you  out. 
(b)  If  possible  keep  your  head  above  the  water,  and  if 
vou  find  vou  have  to  go  under  close  your  mouth  and 


No.  13 
1  is  splint  on  outside  of  arm  from  shoulder 
to  elbow.  2  shoestrings  used  to  hold  splints 
in  place.  3  underwear  used  as  padding.  4 
where  the  arm  is  broken.  5  is  splint  on  in- 
side of  arm  from  armpit  to  elbow. 


No.  14 
1  is  splint  on  outside  of  arm  from  elbow  to 
fingers.  2  is  underwear  used  as  padding.  3 
shoestrings  used  to  hold  splints  in  place. 
4  where  th^  arm  is  broken.  5  is  splint  on  in- 
side of  arm  to  ends  of  fingers. 


No.  15 
1  is  lower  end  of  shirt  used  as  sling.  2  shows 
shirt  held  in  position  by  two  safety  pins. 


No.  16 
Showing  belt  used  as  sling. 


FIRST  AID  137 

hold  your  breath.    If  you  do  this  you  will  come  to 
the  surface  in  a  very  short  time, 
(c)  Do  not  throw  your  arms  out  of  the  water  or  try  to 
raise  them  above  your  head.    If  you  do  your  head 
will  go  under. 
877.  Q.  In  what  way  can  you  keep  your  head  above  the  surface 
for  a  long  time? 
A.  (a)  Throw  your  head  back  with  your  face  turned  up  so 
just  your  nose  and  mouth  stick  out  of  the  water. 

(b)  Keep  working  your  hands  and  feet  slowly  up  and 
down.  In  this  way  you  will  float  for  a  long  time 
and  not  become  tired. 

(c)  The  smallest  piece  of  board  or  driftwood  will  be  a 
great  help  in  keeping  you  afloat. 

378.  Q.  If  a  person  swims  out  to  rescue  you  what  should  you  do? 
A.  (a)  Remain  in  the  same  position  as  when  floating. 

(b)  Try  to  do  exactly  as  the  person  rescuing  you  tells 
you  to  do. 

(c)  Never  grasp  the  person  rescuing  you  with  your  arms 
or  legs.    If  you  do  you  will  both  drown. 

(d)  When  he  starts  to  tow  you  turn  on  your  back  and 
if  possible  without  interfering  with  him  paddle  with 
your  hands  and  feet. 

879.  Q.  In  what  danger  is  a  swimmer  when  he  tries  to  rescue  a 

drowning  man? 
A,  He  is  in  danger  of  being  drowned  by  the  drowning  man 
getting  a  ''death  grip"  on  him  and  preventing  the 
rescuer  from  swimming. 

880.  Q.  What  would  you  do  when  you  had  reached  the  drowning 

man? 
A.  (a)  Tell  him  to  stop  struggling  and  keep  his  arms  and 
legs  away  from  you  and  you  will  be  able  to  save  him. 

(b)  Do  not  attempt  to  take  hold  of  him  until  he  has 
stopped  struggling  and  is  quiet. 

(c)  Do  not  allow  him  to  grasp  you  with  his  arms  or 
legs. 

881.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  he  did  get  a  grip  on  you  with  his 

arms  or  \e^? 


138  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Push  his  head  under  the  water  and  hold  it  there  until 
he  relaxed,  or  strike  him  in  the  face  with  your  fist  or 
choke  him. 

882.  Q.  After  he  has  become  quiet  how  would  you  take  hold  of 

him? 

A.  (a)  Swim  around  him  so  you  could  suddenly  grasp  him 
by  the  hair,  the  collar  or  under  the  arms,  and  then 
turn  him  on  his  back. 

(b)  Then  give  him  a  quick  pull  toward  you,  which  will 
bring  his  body  near  the  surface,  and  at  the  same  time 
turn  on  your  back.  See  picture  No.  26.  This  should 
place  his  back  on  your  stomach  and  the  back  of  his 
head  on  your  chest. 

(c)  Place  your  hands  under  his  jaw  on  each  side  and 
swim  with  your  legs  and  elbows.    See  picture  No.  26. 

883.  Q.  What  causes  a  man  to  die  when  he  is  kept  under  watert 
A.  He  tries  to  breathe  and  instead  of  drawing  air  into  his 

lungs,  draws  in  water  which  fills  his  lungs  so  that 
the  air  can  not  enter. 

884.  Q.  Then  what  is  the  first  thing  to  do  for  him  when  he  is 

taken  out  of  the  water? 
A.  Try  to  get  the  water  out  of  his  lungs. 

885.  Q.  How  would  you  do  that? 

A.  (a)  Open  his  clothing  about  his  neck. 

(b)  Turn  him  on  his  face. 

(c)  Stand  astraddle  of  him  and  pick  him  up  by  placing 
your  hands  under  his  belly  just  above  his  hips  and 
lift  him  up  so  his  face  falls  toward  his  toes.  See 
picture  No.  20. 

(d)  Hold  him  in  this  position  and  shake  him  up  and 
down  several  times. 

886.  Q.  You  have  the  water  out  of  him  so  that  the  air  can  go 

in  his  limgs.    Now  what  are  you  going  to  do  for  him? 

A.  (a)  Wipe  out  his  mouth  as  far  back  as  you  can  reach, 
as  his  mouth  may  be  filled  with  mud  or  sand,  or 
mucus  (phlegm)  and  this  would  keep  the  air  from 
entering  his  lungs. 


No.   17 
2,  3,  are  splints  on  inside,  behind,  and  outside  of  leg  from  below  sole  of  foot  to  above 


1  .  . 

knee.     4  where  bone  is  broken.    5  shoestrings  to  hold  splints  in  place, 
splints  in  place.     7  is  underwear  and  O.  D.  shirt  used  for  padding. 


6  is  hat  cord  to  hold 


No.  18 

Shows  broken  leg  same  as  in  plate  No.  17  but  with  legs  tied  together  so  he  can  be  moved. 

1  is  where  leg  is  broken.     2  are  belts  used  to  tie  legs  together. 


No.  19 
1,  2,  are  splints  reaching  from  crotch  to  below  sole  of  foot  on  inside  and  behind  leg.     3  is 
splint  reaching  from  armpit  to  below  sole  of  foot.     4  shoestrings,  hat  cord,  and  belts  used  to 
hold  splints  in  position.     5  is  where  bone  is  broken. 


FIRST  AID  139 

(b)  Try  to  start  him  breathing  by  artificial  respiration. 

887.  Q.  How  would  you  give  artificial  respiration? 

A.  (a)  Lay  him  face  down,  turn  head  to  one  side  so  that 
nose  and  mouth  are  not  in  the  dirt. 

(b)  Bring  his  arms  straight  up  above  his  head.  See 
picture  No.  20. 

(c)  Get  astraddle  of  his  legs  up  close  to  his  hips  and 
pull  up  his  shirt  and  find  the  lower  edge  of  the  lowest 
rib. 

(d)  Turn  your  hands  outward  so  your  fingers  point 
away  from  his  backbone,  then  put  the  heels  of  your 
hands  down  on  his  back  a  couple  of  inches  from  his 
back  bone,  one  on  each  side  of  the  backbone,  the 
little  finger  of  each  hand  being  along  the  lower  edge 
of  the  lowest  rib  on  each  side. 

(e)  Keep  you  arms  stiff  and  throw  your  weight  forward 
on  your  hands  and  stay  in  that  position  for  about 
three  seconds.    See  picture  No.  22. 

(f)  Suddenly  take  off  your  weight,  then  wait  two  or 
three  seconds  and  then  put  on  weight  again  as  before. 

(g)  Repeat  these  movements  twelve  or  fifteen  times  a 
minute.  If  a  man  is  larger  than  you,  when  you  put 
your  weight  on  your  hands  raise  your  body  so  all  your 
weight  is  on  the  heels  of  your  hands  and  your  toes. 
Never  keep  weight  on  man  longer  than  three  seconds. 
See  picture  No.  23. 

888.  Q.  What  is  the  best  way  to  time  the  movements  in  artificial 

respiration? 
A.  Have  comrade  time  you  with  watch,  or  lay  your  own 
watch  down  by  your  side  where  you  can  see  the 
time.    If  you  have  no  watch,  time  it  by  your  breath- 
ing.    You  breathe  once  about  every  three  seconds. 

889.  Q.  How  long  would  you  keep  up  artificial  respiration? 
A.  At  least  two  hours. 

890.  Q.  After  he  started  to  breathe  what  would  you  do? 

A.  As  soon  as  he  is  conscious  give  him  something  hot  to 
drink,  black  coffee  being  the  best;  watch  him  carefully 
as  he  may  stop  breathing  again;  wrap  him  in  blankets 


140  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

and  do  not  move  him  or  allow  him  to  stand  until  his 
breathing  has  been  deep  and  regular  for  an  hour  or 
more. 

First  Aid  in  Poisoning  and  Snake  Bite 

891.  Q.  When  a  man  takes  poison  of  any  kind  what  is  the  first 

thing  to  do? 
A.  Get  as  much  of  it  out  of  him  as  you  can  as  quickly  as  pos- 
sible, or  give  him  something  that  will  change  the  poison 
so  that  it  will  no  longer  act  as  a  poison. 

892.  Q.  What  could  you  do  to  get  the  poison  out  of  him? 

A.  Cause  him  to  empty  his  stomach  by  vomiting;  to  do  this 
give  him  a  glass  of  warm  water  with  a  teaspoonful  of 
salt  in  it,  or  a  glass  of  warm  water  with  a  teaspoonful 
of  mustard  in  it;  then  put  your  finger  down  his  throat 
as  far  as  you  can,  or  tickle  the  back  part  of  his  throat 
with  a  feather,  until  he  vomits ;  give  water  from  time  to 
time  and  keep  him  vomiting  until  the  water  he  throws 
up  is  clear. 

893.  Q.  When  should  you  not  give  him  something  to  make  him 

throw  up? 
A.  If  there  were  bums  on  his  Mps  or  in  his  mouth;  this 
would  show  he  had  taken  carbolic  or  some  other  strong 
acid. 

894.  Q.  What  could  you  give  him  to  change  the  poison  so  that  it 

would  no  longer  act  as  a  poison? 
A.  Hot  strong  tea,  milk  or  white  of  an  egg  are  best;  these 
should  be  given  before  the  mustard  or  salt  water;  if 
there  are  bums,  these  should  be  given  alone. 

895.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  a  man  was  bitten  by  a  poisonous 

snake? 
A.  (a)  At  once  place  a  tourniquet  without  a  pad  betw^een 
the  wound  and  the  heart. 

(b)  With  a  clean  knife,  the  blade  of  which  has  been 
heated  in  a  match  flame,  make  the  bite  larger  so  that 
the  blood  will  flow  out. 

(c)  Have  the  injured  man  or  comrade  suck  the  wound. 


No.  26 
Position  for  Rescue. 


1  shows  arm  above  head. 


No.  21 
2  shows  head  turned  to  one  side.     3  shows  proper  place  for  hand 
to  make  pressure.     4  shows  backbone. 


No.  22 

1  shows  hands  in  proper  position.     2  shows  arms  stiff  with  weight  thrown  on  hands  and  man 
making  pressure  resting  on  his  knees. 


No.  23 
Shows  weight  on  hands  and  toes 


FIRST  AID  141 

(d)  Give  stimulants  of  some  kind,  like  whiskey  or  black 
coffee  in  small  doses. 

896.  Q.  Why  would  you  put  on  this  tourniquet? 

A.  To  keep  the  poison  that  is  in  the  wound  from  being 
carried  into  his  system. 

897.  Q.  How  long  would  you  leave  this  tourniquet  on? 
A.  About  a  half  to  three  quarters  of  an  hour. 

898.  Q.  How  would  you  take  it  off? 

A.  By  untwisting  a  turn;  then  waiting  a  few  minutes,  and 
untwisting  another  turn ;  continue  in  this  way  until  the 
tourniquet  is  loose,  taking  about  a  half  hour  to  com- 
pletely imtwist  it. 

899.  Q.  Why  is  this  necessary? 

A.  By  loosening  it  slowly  he  will  get  what  poison  there  is  left 
in  the  wound  into  his  system  in  such  small  amounts 
that  it  will  not  poison  him. 

900.  Q.  What  would  cause  you  to  tighten  the  tourniquet  again? 
A,  If  the  man,  at  any  time,  complains  of  feeling  dizzy  or  sick 

at  his  stomach. 

901.  Q.  Why  would  this  cause  you  to  tighten  the  tourniquet 

again?- 
A.  His  complaining  of  feeling  sick  at  his  stomach  or  dizzy 
would  show  that  he  was  getting  enough  poison  into 
his  system  from  the  wound  to  poison  him,  so  the  tour- 
niquet would  have  to  be  tightened  again  to  stop  it. 

First  Aid  in  Burns  and  Freezing 

902.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  spilled  boiling  water  over  your 

hand  and  arm? 
A.  Keep  the  whole  burned  surface  under  warm  water  so  as 
to  keep  out  the  air;  if  there  are  blisters  do  not  open 
them  but  put  on  clean  handkerchief  or  bandage  and 
bandage  lightly,  and  report  to  medical  officer  at  once. 
If  the  clothing  is  stuck  to  the  burned  surface,  do  not 
try  to  remove,  but  cut  off  the  rest  of  the  clothing  leav- 
ing the  part  that  is  stuck  remain. 


142  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

903.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  spilled  lye  on  your  hands? 
A.  Pour  vinegar  over  it  and  then  do  the  same  as  above. 

904.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  found  a  comrade's  clothing  all 

ablaze? 
A.  Throw  him  down  and  not  allow  him  to  run,  as  this  would 
increase  the  blaze;  smother  the  blaze  by  throwing 
around  him  a  blanket,  coat  or  overcoat;  after  fire  is  out 
do  the  same  as  above. 

905.  Q.  What  part  of  the  body  is  most  frequently  frozen? 
A.  The  ears,  fingers,  nose,  toes  and  cheeks. 

906.  Q.  How  would  you  know  your  fingers  were  about  to  become 

frozen? 
A.  First  they  would  feel  cold,  then  painful  and  red,  then 
they  would  commence  to  tingle  and  feel  like  they  were 
going  to  sleep  and  at  the  same  time  changing  to  a  dark 
red  color;  after  this,  all  feeling  leaves  them  and  they 
become  white. 

907.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  found  one  of  your  hands  or 

feet  frozen? 
A.  Keep  away  from  the  fire  or  warm  room;  if  possible,  put 
the  part  in  a  bucket  of  ice  water  and  rub  briskly;  if  not, 
rub  briskly  with  wet  snow;  never  rub  with  dry  snow. 
Keep  this  up  until  the  feeling  and  color  returns  in  the 
part;  then  wrap  in  cloths  wrung  out  in  ice  water. 

First  Aid  in  Fainting,  Heat  Exhaustion,  and  Sunstroke 

908.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  a  comrade  fell  in  a  faint? 
A.  (a)  Place  his  head  lower  than  his  body. 

(b)  Keep  the  crowd  from  collecting  around  him. 

(c)  Open  his  clothing  about  his  neck  and  chest. 

(d)  Sponge  his  head  and  face  with  cold  water. 

909.  Q.  How  would  you  tell  the  difference  between  heat  ex- 

haustion and  heat  stroke? 

A.  HEAT  EXHAUSTION  HEAT  STROKE 

Skin  cold  to  touch  Skin  very  hot  to  touch 

Skin  damp  Skin  dry 


FIRST  AID  143 

HEAT  EXHAUSTION  HEAT  STROKE 

Face  pale  Face  very  red 

Breathing  shallow  and      Breathing  deep  and  snoring 

sighing  Man  usually  unconscious  and 

Man  not  unconscious,  cannot  be  aroused 

easily  aroused 

910.  Q.  What  would  you  do  for  heat  stroke? 
A.  (a)  Place  in  coolest  place  possible. 

(b)  Pour  cold  water  over  entire  body,  or  if  possible  rub 
entire  body  with  ice. 

(c)  When  conscious  give  cold  (not  ice)  water  to  drink  in 
small  quantities  frequently. 

911.  Q.  For  heat  exhaustion? 

A.  (a)  Place  him  in  the  shade. 

(b)  Open  his  clothing  around  his  neck. 

(c)  Lower  his  head. 

(d)  Give  stimulants  such  as  black  coffee. 

(e)  Wrap  him  in  blankets  and  rub  limbs  until  they  feel 
warm. 

Care  of  the  Feet 

912.  Q.  What  are  the  most  common  troubles  a  soldier  may 

have  with  his  feet  while  on  the  march? 
A.  Corns,  blisters,  bunions,  inflamed  or  swollen  tendons 
(cords  or  leaders),  and  ingrowing  nails, 

913.  Q.  What  causes  corns,  blisters  and  bunions? 
A.  (a)  Shoes  that  do  not  fit  properly. 

(b)  Socks  that  wrinkle. 

(c)  Wrinkles  in  the  lining  of  the  shoes. 

(d)  Dirt  in  the  shoes. 

(e)  Dirty  socks  or  dirty  feet. 

(f )  Not  having  the  feet  properly  hardened  before  starting 
on  a  long  march. 

(g)  Socks  that  are  too  tight. 

914.  Q.  How  can  shoes  be  fitted  to  the  feet? 

A.  After  the  shoes  have  been  properly  fitted  to  the  feet  by 
the  Company  Commander,  stand  for  five  minutes  in 


144  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

water  well  above  the  soles  of  the  shoes;  then  walk  over 
a  level  surface  until  the  shoes  are  perfectly  dry;  then 
rub  shoes  with  a  light  coat  of  ''Neat's  Foot  Oil/' 

915.  Q.  What  can  be  done  to  prevent  blisters  other  than  having 

a  properly  fitted  shoe? 
A.  (a)  Always  wear  woolen  socks. 

(b)  See  that  the  socks  have  no  holes  or  wrinkles  in  them, 
and  that  they  are  not  too  tight. 

(c)  See  that  there  are  no  wrinkles  in  the  shoe  lining, 

(d)  Put  on  clean  socks  every  morning. 

(e)  Use  foot  powder  in  shoes  and  socks  every  morning. 

(f )  Bathe  the  feet  every  evening,  or  at  least  wipe  them 
off  with  a  wet  towel. 

(g)  Put  on  adhesive  plaster  over  any  red  or  tender  spots. 

916.  Q.  If  a  blister  has  formed  while  on  the  march  what  would 

you  do? 
A.  (a)  Open  the  edge  of  blister  with  the  point  of  a  knife  or 
needle  that  has  been  heated  in  a  match  flame. 

(b)  Be  sure  and  get  all  of  the  fluid  out  of  the  blister;  to 
leave  any  in  it  may  make  it  worse. 

(c)  Put  on  adhesive  plaster  covering  the  skin  well  be- 
yond the  edges  of  the  blisters,  putting  on  as 
tightly  as  possible  without  wrinkles. 

917.  Q.  What  is  a  good  way  to  stop  a  shoe  from  rubbing  the  heel? 
A.  Put  a  piece  of  felt  or  cloth  between  the  tongue  of  the  shoe 

and  the  lace  and  then  lace  tightly. 

918.  Q.  Where  are  the  tendons  that  usually  become  inflamed  or 

swollen? 
A.  (a)  The  large  cord  that  can  be  felt  just  above  the  heel  at 
the  back  of  the  foot, 
(b)  The  several  small  cords  that  can  be  felt  in  front  of 
the  ankle  and  on  top  of  the  foot. 

919.  Q.  What  causes  them  to  become  painful  or  swollen? 

A.  (a)  Lacing  lower  part  of  leggin  too  tightly. 

(b)  Lacing  shoe  too  tightly. 

(c)  Folds  in  tongue  of  shoe  or  knots  in  the  shoe  strings 
pressing  on  lie  ^endons. 


FIRST  AID  145 

(d)  Strap  on  back  of  shoe  pressing  against  big  tendon 
above  heel  by  lower  part  of  leggin. 

920.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  found  you  had  an  inflamed 

tendon? 
A.  Report  to  medical  officer  as  soon  as  pain  is  first  noticed. 
If  this  is  impossible  remove  any  of  the  above  causes 
that  may  be  present;  soak  foot  in  cold  water  and  then 
massage  over  tendon;  then  strap  tendons  down  as 
tightly  as  possible  with  adhesive  plaster. 

921.  Q.  What  causes  ingrowing  nails? 

A.  Not  trimming  the  nails  properly  and  shoes  that  are  too 
tight  across  the  toes. 

922.  Q.  How  should  the  nails  be  trimmed? 

A.  Straight  across,  leaving  the  comers  square. 

923.  Q.  What  would  you  do  if  you  had  a  nail  just  starting  to  grow 

in? 
A.  (a)  Cut  the  nail  square  across  the  ends. 

(b)  Cut  a  V-shaped  piece  out  of  the  centre  of  the  end. 

(c)  Scrape  the  nail  as  thin  as  possible  from  the  point 
of  the  V  back  toward  the  flesh.    See  picture  No.  24. 

(d)  Soak  the  foot  in  hot  water  every  night  and  gently 
press  flesh  away  from  the  sides  of  the  nail. 

(e)  If  possible  work  a  piece  of  cotton  imdemeath  the 
edges  of  the  nail  where  it  has  started  to  grow  in. 

(f)  Do  not  cut  out  the  comers  but  leave  them  grow 
out  square.    See  picture  No.  25. 

(g)  Do  not  cut  nail  close  enough  to  cause  bleeding  as 
this  may  cause  blood  poisoning. 


CHAPTER  XI 
CAMP  SANITATION  AND  PERSONAL  HYGIENE 

Flies 

924.  Q.  Why  are  flies  dangerous? 
A.  Because  they  carry  disease. 

925.  Q.  How  do  they  carry  disease? 

A.  By  carrying  germs  from  the  places  they  feed  to  our  food. 

926.  Q.  How  do  they  carry  these  germs? 

A.  (a)  By  the  germs  sticking  to  their  bodies  and  legs. 
A  single  fly  has  been  known  to  carry  as  many  as  six 
miUion  germs  at  one  time. 

(b)  By  the  Hquid  from  their  mouths  they  put  on  the 
food  to  soften  it  so  they  can  eat  it. 

(c)  By  depositing  ''fly  specks"  which  contain  germs, 
on  the  food. 

927.  Q.  Where  do  flies  feed? 

A.  (a)  In  the  "rears,"  not  properly  covered. 

(b)  On  any  waste  matter  that  is  not  put  in  the  "rears." 

(c)  On  food  that  is  not  covered  in  kitchen  and  dining 
room. 

(d)  In  garbage  cans. 

(e)  Around  picket  lines  and  stables. 

(f)  Where  greasy  water  has  been  thrown  on  the  ground. 

(g)  On  small  pieces  of  garbage  that  have  been  scattered 
over  the  ground. 

(h)  They  may  feed  in  any  of  these  places  and  in  a 
few  minutes  afterwards  al  ght  on  your  food  and  leave 
the  germs  they  have  picked  up  in  these  places  or 
pieces  of  the  waste  matter  from  the  "rears"  or  picket 
line  on  the  food  you  eat. 

928.  Q.  Where  do  flies  lay  their  eggs? 
A.  (a)  In  the  "rears." 

146 


CAMP  SANITATION  AND  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  147 

(b)  In  horse  manure  and  unclean  picket  lines. 

(c)  In  garbage  cans  not  properly  covered. 

(d)  In  the  ground  where  greasy  water  has  been  thrown. 

(e)  In  partially  burned  garbage  that  is  frequently 
found  around  incinerators. 

929.  Q.  How  many  eggs  will  a  fly  lay  at  a  time? 
A.  One  hundred  to  two  hundred. 

930.  Q.  How  long  does  it  take  these  eggs  to  hatch  and  full 

grown  flies  come  out? 

A.  Ten  to  twelve  days. 

931.  Q.  If  flies  have  the  proper  feeding  places  will  they  increase 

in  number  very  rapidly? 

A.  Yes,  one  female  and  her  offspring  will  produce  over 
twelve  million  flies  in  forty  days,  even  though  half 
their  eggs  do  not  hatch. 

932.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  diseases  that  flies  may  carry? 

A.  Typhoid  fever,  diarrhea,  dysentery,  cholera  and  tape 
worms. 

983.  Q.  What  is  the  best  way  to  keep  flies  away  from  a  camp? 

A.  (a)  Destroy  their  breeding  places,  this  is  the  first  and 
most  important. 

(b)  Destroy  their  feeding  places — don't  feed  them. 

(c)  Use  fly  traps  and  fly  paper. 

(d)  Swat  them. 

934.  Q.  How  can  their  breeding  places  be  destroyed? 

A.  (a)  By  burning  out  the  "rears''  every  day. 

(b)  By  removing  the  manure  from  the  picket  line  and 
stables  every  day,  and  burning  over  the  ground 
around  the  picket  line  once  a  week. 

(c)  By  putting  all  garbage  and  greasy  water  in  the 
incinerator,  and  seeing  that  it  is  completely  burned. 

(d)  By  daily  policing  around  the  kitchen  and  kitchen 
incinerator. 

(e)  By  removing  every  day  small  pieces  of  garbage, 
waste  matter  and  horse  manure  that  may  be  scattered 
over  the  ground. 


148  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

935.  Q.  How  can  their  feeding  places  be  destroyed? 

A.  (a)  Have  all  deposits  in  the  ''rears"  completely  covered 
at  once. 

(b)  Bury  any  waste  matter  that  may  be  found  near  the 
camp. 

(c)  Have  all  foodstuffs  covered  with  mosquito  bars  or 
cheese  cloth. 

(d)  Do  not  allow  dirty  dishes  or  cooking  utensils  to 
set  around  exposed. 

(e)  Keep  garbage  cans  covered. 

(f)  Do  not  throw  greasy  water  on  the  ground. 

(g)  Have  horse  manure  and  small  pieces  of  garbage 
collected  and  burned  by  camp  ''police"  each  day. 

(h)  By  the  proper  "police"  of  the  picket  lines. 

CapwS  of  the  Health  in  Garrison,  on  the  March  and  in  the 

Camp 

in  garrison 

936.  Q.  How  often  should  a  man  bathe? 

A.  At  least  twice  a  week  bathe  the  whole  body  with  warm 
water  and  soap  and  follow  this  with  cold  water. 

937.  Q.  Why  is  this  necessary? 

A.  The  sweat  is  being  poured  out  on  the  skin  at  all  times; 
it  dries  on  the  skin  and  collects  the  dust  and  dirt. 
Germs  that  are  always  on  the  skin  will  grow  and 
multiply  by  the  million  in  this  sweat  and  dirt  so  that 
any  slight  injury  to  the  skin  will  become  infected  and 
abscesses  or  boils  form. 

938.  Q.  Why  is  it  that  men  so  frequently  have  boils  when  in 

the  field? 
A.  They  usually  do  not  have  as  good  means  for  bathing 
as  in  garrison,  and  this  dirt,  sweat  and  germs  collect 
on  the  skin;  these  germs  are  constantly  rubbed  into 
the  skin  by  the  equipment,  that  is  why  boils  are  so 
often  seen  where  the  belt  or  pack  rubs  against  the 
man. 

939.  Q.  Why  should  every  man  wash  his  hands  before  each  meal? 


CAMP  SANITATION  AND  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  149 

A.  (a)  Because  he  probably  has  been  handling  something 
that  others  have  been  handling. 

(b)  These  other  persons  may  have  some  disease  and 
the  germs  of  this  disease  will  be  on  things  they  handle. 

(c)  Your  hands  pick  up  these  germs. 

(d)  Then  you  get  these  germs  on  your  food  and  that 
may  give  you  the  disease. 

940.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  diseases  that  may  be  carried 

that  way? 

A.  Typhoid  fever,  cholera,  syphilis,  tuberculosis  (con- 
sumption). 

941.  Q.  How  often  should  the  underclothing  be  changed? 

A.  Twice  a  week,  and  the  underclothing  that  is  worn  during 
the  day  should  not  be  worn  at  night. 

942.  Q.  How  often  should  your  bedding  be  changed? 

A.  Pillow  cases  and  sheets  should  be  washed  once  a  week 
and  the  blankets  and  mattress  aired  once  a  week. 

943.  Q.  What  vermin  is  a  man  liable  to  get  when  he  does  not 

keep  his  body  and  clothing  clean? 
A.  Different  kinds  of  lice. 

944.  Q.  What  are  the  common  kinds  of  lice? 

A.  (a)  The  head  louse,  which  usually  lives  in  the  hair  of 
the  head. 

(b)  The  body  louse  (gray-back),  which  usually  lives  in 
the  clothing. 

(c)  The  body  louse  (crab-louse),  which  usually  lives 
in  the  hair  of  the  body. 

945.  Q.  In  what  way  can  Uce  harm  you? 

A.  They  not  only  suck  your  blood  and  cause  irritation  of 
the  skin,  but  they  may  carry  disease  from  one  person 
to  another. 

946.  Q.  What  should  you  do  if  you  found  you  had  lice  of  any 

kind? 
A.  Report  at  once  to  the  Medical  Officer  for  treatment, 
and  treat  yourself  exactly  as  he  tells  you.    Do  not 
try  to  get  rid  of  them  yourself;  you  may  be  able  to 


150  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

do  so  for  a  time,  but  they  usually  come  back  again 
for  their  knits  or  eggs  are  hard  to  kill  and  unless  you 
are  instructed  how  to  kill  these  knits  and  eggs  they 
will  hatch  out  a  long  time  after  you  have  killed  all 
the  lice  and  you  will  find  you  will  have  another  crop 
of  them  several  weeks  after  you  think  you  are  cured. 

947.  Q.  What  causes  the  teeth  to  decay? 

A.  Not  cleaning  the  teeth  and  mouth  properly. 

948.  Q.  How  often  should  you  clean  your  teeth? 

A.  At  least  twice  a  day,  especially  before  going  to  bed  at 
night. 

949.  Q.  What  should  you  use  to  clean  your  teeth? 

A.  A  good  stiff  brush  and  a  good  tooth  paste  or  powder 
that  has  no  gritty  material  in  it. 

950.  Q.  How  should  you  clean  your  teeth? 

A.  (a)  Brush  the  back  part  of  the  teeth  as  well  as  the 
front,  brushing  up  and  down  the  long  way  of  the 
teeth  instead  of  across  them. 

(b)  Brush  the  gums  as  well  as  the  teeth. 

(c)  After  brushing  all  the  teeth  in  this  way  rinse  the 
mouth  thoroughly  with  warm  water. 

951.  Q.  Why  should  you  brush  the  gums  as  well  as  the  teeth? 

A.  It  makes  them  harder  and  keeps  them  from  getting 
soft,  spongy  and  sore  and  liable  to  bleed  easily. 

952.  Q.  How  should  you  care  for  your  tooth  brush? 

A.  (a)  Rinse  off  thoroughly  after  using  each  time. 

(b)  Allow  it  to  dry  by  hanging  it  up  or  lajdng  in  some 
clean  place. 

(c)  Do  not  carry  brush  in  your  pocket,  leggin  or  ha^ 
band. 

(d)  Do  not  use  brush  after  the  bristles  become  worn, 
soft  or  loose. 

953.  Q.  What  happens  when  the  teeth  are  not  properly  cleaned 

every  day? 

A.  (a)  Part  of  the  food  remains  between  the  teeth  or  be- 
tween the  teeth  and  the  ^ms. 


CAMP  SANITATION  AND  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  151 

(b)  These  particles  of  food  decompose  and  give  a  bad 
odor  to  the  breath  and  a  bad  taste  in  the  mouth;  also 
later  cause  the  teeth  to  decay. 

(c)  Later  where  these  particles  of  food  collect  hard 
crusts  form,  and  these  crusts  are  called  tartar. 

(d)  This  tartar  discolors  the  teeth  and  causes  the  gums 
to  become  sore. 

954.  Q.  What  causes  tooth  ache? 

A.  Holes  or  cavities  in  the  teeth. 

955.  Q.  In  addition  to  brushing  in  what  other  way  should  these 

particles  of  food  be  removed  from  between  the  teeth? 
A.  By  working  dental  floss  or  thread  between  the  teeth, 
but  do  not  use  a  pin  or  metal  pick,  or  a  hard  wood 
pick. 

956.  Q.  What  else  may  happen  to  a  tooth  besides  causing  it 

to  ache  when  a  cavity  forms  in  it? 
A.  Pus  may  collect  at  its  root.    This  is  what  is  commonly 
called  "an  ulcerated  tooth"  or  an  ''abscessed  tooth." 

957.  Q.  How  can  tooth  ache  or  an  abscess  at  the  root  of  a  tooth 

be  prevented? 
A.  (a)  By  using  a  stiff  tooth  brush  regularly. 

(b)  By  keeping  the  food  from  collecting  between  the 
teeth  and  around  the  gums  by  using  dental  floss. 

(c)  By  reporting  to  the  Bental  Surgeon  at  once  as  soon 
as  a  small  cavity  is  found,  and  not  waiting  until  the 
cavity  becomes  deep  enough  to  cause  the  tooth  to  ache. 

(d)  Have  the  teeth  examined  at  least  twice  a  year  by 
a  Dental  Surgeon,  as  small  cavities  will  form  between 
your  teeth  without  your  knowing  it  imtil  they  begin 
to  ache. 

958.  Q.  What  is  a  gum  boil? 

A.  It  is  the  pus  from  an  abscess  at  the  root  of  a  tooth 
forcing  its  way  out  through  the  gums. 

959.  Q.  What  should  you  do  for  it? 

A.  Report  to  a  Dental  Surgeon  at  once. 

960.  Q.  What  besides  cavities  in  the  teeth  may  come  from  not 

keeping:  the  mouth  clean? 


152  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  (a)  Particles  of  food  collect  between  the  gums  and  the 
teeth  and  decompose. 
(b)  Germs  will  collect  there  and  pus  will  form  under  the 
gums,  (pyorrhea). 

961.  Q.  What  harm  does  this  do? 

A.  (a)  It  inflames  the  gums  and  makes  them  tender  so 
the  food  will  not  be  properly  chewed. 

(b)  When  the  food  is  chewed  this  pus  is  squeezed  out 
from  under  the  gums  and  is  swallowed  with  the  food. 

(c)  After  a  time  the  gums  will  shrink  away  from  the 
teeth  and  the  teeth  become  loose,  and  may  fall  out. 

962.  Q.  How  may  decayed  teeth  or  pus  under  the  gums  affect 

your  health? 
A.  (a)  It  keeps  the  food  from  being  properly  chewed,  be- 
cause of  the  soreness,  and  this  keeps  it  from  being 
properly  digested. 

(b)  It  causes  a  bad  taste  in  the  mouth  and  bad  breath, 
loss  of  appetite,  and  later  trouble  with  the  stomach. 

(c)  This  collection  of  pus  under  the  gums  allows  germs  to 
get  into  the  body  either  by  being  swallowed  with 
the  food  or  getting  into  the  blood  through  the 
gums,  and  these  germs  may  give  you  disease, 
especially  rheumatism. 

963 .  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  all  kinds  of  garbage  and  waste 

from  the  kitchen  and  table? 
A.  It  should  be  put  in  the  cans  provided  for  that  purpose 
and  these  cans  kept  covered. 
Why  is  this  necessary? 

If  even  the  smallest  particles  of  garbage  are  allowed  to 
become  scattered  around  they  will  attract  flies. 

ON  THE  MARCH 

964.  Q.  What  should  you  do  at  the  first  halt  on  the  march? 

A.  Re-adjust  the  pack  or  any  part  of  the  equipment  that  has 
felt  uncomfortable.  Loosen  the  shoe  and  legging  laces 
if  they  feel  at  all  tight;  if  shoes  feel  uncomfortable  look 
for  dirt  or  wrinkles  in  the  socks;  go  to  the  ''rear''  if  you 
have  not  ab-eady  done  so  before  the  start. 


CAMP  SANITATION  AND  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  153 

965.  Q.  What  is  the  best  way  to  get  the  most  benefit  out  of  the 

halt? 
A.  Loosen  the  pack  and  the  belt;  lie  down  if  you  can  and 
keep  your  feet  higher  than  your  head. 

966.  Q.  Why  should  the  water  in  your  canteen  be  used  sparingly? 
A.  (a)  It  should  be  filled  with  good  water  before  starting. 

(b)  This  may  be  all  the  good  water  you  will  be  able  to 
get  until  you  get  into  camp  and  then  you  may  have 
to  wait  some  time  before  you  get  any  more. 

(c)  If  it  is  drunk  in  large  quantities  at  once  it  does  not 
stop  your  thirst  any  more  than  if  it  is  taken  in 
small  sips. 

(d)  If  it  is  taken  in  large  quantities  on  a  hot  day  it  maf 
make  you  sick. 

967.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  things  you  may  do  to  prevenf 

thirst? 
A.  (a)  Drink  your  water  in  small  sips,  just  enough  to  wet 
the  back  part  of  your  mouth. 

(b)  Keep  chewing  gum  or  a  pebble  in  your  mouth. 

(c)  Do  not  smoke  while  marching. 

(d)  Do  not  eat  sweets  or  use  alcoholic  liquors  while 
marching  or  the  night  before. 

968.  Q.  Why  not  re-fill  your  canteen  at  any  well,  spring  or  stream 

that  you  pass? 
A.  Very  often  the  water  from  such  places  may  look  and  taste 
all  right,  but  at  the  same  time  not  be  fit  to  drink  be- 
cause of  cesspools,  privies,  or  stables  may  drain  in 
them  and  drinking  such  water  may  give  you  disease,  so 
canteens  should  be  filled  only  from  such  places  as  a 
medical  or  other  officer  tells  you  the  water  is  fit  to 
drink. 

969.  Q.  What  diseases  may  you  get  from  drinking  such  water? 
A.  Typhoid  fever,  cholera,  dysentery,  diarrhea  and  worms. 

970.  Q.  If  it  became  necessary  for  you  to  go  to  the  ''rear"  while 

on  the  march  where  should  you  go? 
A.  A  place  some  distance  from  the  road,  and  then  remember 
to  cover  your  deposit  with  dirt. 


154  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

971.  Q.  Why  is  this  necessary? 

A.  Other  troops  may  be  following  you  and  camp  near  this 
place,  or  you  may  camp  here  later.  If  this  deposit  is 
not  covered  properly,  flies  will  collect  there  and  then  go 
to  the  camp  kitchens,  or  it  may  be  blown  into  the  camp 
kitchens  by  the  wind. 

972.  Q.  Why  should  you  not  buy  fruits,  candy,  soft  drinks  or  ice 

cream  from  vendors  along  the  road? 
A.  (a)  Fruits  may  be  covered  by  disease  germs  from  the 
hands  of  the  vender. 

(b)  Candy  will  increase  your  thirst. 

(c)  Soft  drinks  are  usually  ice  cold  and  if  drunk  in  large 
quantities  may  make  you  sick. 

(d)  The  same  is  true  for  ice  cream,  and  the  kind  sold  by 
these  people  is  usually  made  out  of  the  dirtiest 
kind  of  milk  which  may  contain  all  kinds  of  disease 
germs. 

IN  CAMP 

973.  Q.  What  is  the  best  thing  to  do  when  you  get  into  camp 

feehng  tired  and  exhausted? 
A.  Remove  equipments  at  once;  drink  a  cup  of  hot  black 
coffee  and  eat  a  sandwich;  do  not  eat  a  heavy  meal 
until  after  you  have  rested. 

974.  Q.  What  will  overeating  and  poorly  chewed  food  do  to  you? 
A.  Give  you  cramps  and  diarrhea. 

975.  Q.  What  should  you  do  as  soon  as  your  tents  are  pitched? 
A.  Ditch  the  tent,  level  the  floor  and  make  a  dry  bed  with 

straw,  leaves,  grass  or  boughs. 

976.  Q.  When  should  mosquito  bars  be  used? 

A.  Every  night  when  camped  in  places  wnere  there  arc 
mosquitoes. 

977.  Q.  What  is  the  danger  from  mosquitoes? 
A.  Their  bite  may  give  you  disease. 

978.  Q.  What  diseases  can  mosquitoes  give  you? 

A.  Malaria  fever,  yellow  fever  and  dengue  (break  bone 
fever). 


CAMP  SANITATION  AND  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  155 

979.  Q.  What  is  one  of  the  first  things  that  is  always  done  when 

you  get  into  camp? 
A.  A  pit  or  latrine  is  always  dug  by  each  company  for  a 
''rear/' 

980.  Q.  Where  should  ''rears''  be  dug? 

A.  (a)  Always  at  the  opposite  end  of  the  company  street 
from  the  kitchen. 

(b)  About  fifty  yards  from  the  last  tent  on  the  company 
street. 

(c)  On  ground  high  enough  to  prevent  flooding  in  case  of 
rain. 

(d)  On  ground  that  does  not  drain  into  a  stream  from 
which  water  is  used. 

581.  Q.  What  would  you  do  to  any  "rear"  that  you  build  to 
prevent  its  flooding? 
A.  Either  ditch  "rear"  tent  or  ditch  the  pit. 

982.  Q.  Why  should  "rears"  be  dug  as  soon  as  getting  into 

camp? 
A.  So  that  the  men  will  have  a  place  to  go  to  the  "rear" 
and  will  not  have  to  soil  the  ground  around  the  camp. 

983.  Q.  What  is  the  difference  if  they  do  soil  the  ground  if  they 

go  some  distance  from  camp? 
A.  This  will  cause  the  flies  to  collect  at  this  place,  and  these 
flies  will  afterwards  find  their  way  to  the  kitchens;  also 
as  the  earth  dries  it  will  be  carried  by  the  wind  as  dust 
to  the  kitchen  and  get  in  the  food. 

984.  Q.  What  is  the  best  kind  of  a  "rear"  to  use  when  camp  is  to 

be  occupied  for  only  twenty-four  or  forty-eight  hours? 
A.  A  straddle  pit  for  each  company. 

985.  Q.  How  should  it  be  dug? 

A.  Make  it  one  foot  wide,  eight  feet  long  and  two  feet  deep. 

986.  Q.  What  should  you  do  with  the  dirt  taken  out  of  the  pit? 

A.  Pile  it  along  side  the  pit  so  it  can  be  used  by  each  man  to 
cover  up  his  deposit. 

987.  Q.  What  should  be  kept  in  each  "rear"  all  the  time  to  aid 

the  men  in  covering  their  deposit? 


156  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  A  small  piece  of  board  or  bark  to  be  used  as  a  shovel. 

988.  Q.  What  should  every  man  do  that  uses  the  ''rear'7 

A.  See  that  his  deposit  is  completely  covered  with  loose 
earth  that  is  kept  alongside  the  pit,  so  that  flies  cannot 
get  to  any  part  of  it. 

989.  Q.  Why  should  you  sit  astride  of  these  pits  instead  of  along 

the  side? 
A.  If  you  sit  astride,  everything  drops  to  the  bottom  of  the 
pit,  while  if  you  sit  on  the  side,  you  will  soil  the  edges 
of  the  pit  and  flies  will  collect  or  this  soiled  earth  will  be 
carried  on  your  shoes  or  by  the  wind  to  the  kitchens 
and  tents. 

990.  Q.  If  the  camp  is  to  be  used  more  than  forty-eight  hours  how 

would  you  dig  the  pit? 
A.  Dig  it  two  feet  wide,  twelve  feet  long  and  six  feet  deep. 

991.  Q.  If  box  seats  are  furnished  how  should  the  pit  be  dug? 
A.  The  same  as  last  answer  only  the  width  and  the  length 

should  be  so  that  edges  of  the  box  would  come  about 
four  inches  from  the  edges  of  the  pit.  Then  bank  the 
dirt  around  the  bottom  of  the  box  so  flies  cannot  get  in. 

592.  Q.  What  kind  of  care  is  required  for  this  kind  of  a  pit? 
A.  (a)  Scrub  the  box  seat  every  day. 

(b)  Bum  out  pit  with  fifteen  pounds  of  straw  and  one 
gallon  of  oil  once  a  day. 

(c)  See  that  the  lids  and  around  the  edges  of  the  boxes 
are  kept  fly  proof. 

(d)  Dig  new  pit  when  filled  within  two  feet  of  the  top  of 
the  ground.    Fill  old  pit  and  mark  it. 

(e)  Keep  lids  closed  when  not  in  use. 

593.  Q.  In  camps  for  more  than  forty-eight  hours  what  should  be 

used  as  a  urinal  at  night? 

A.  A  tub  or  galvanized  iron  can  should  be  placed  in  each 
company  street  with  a  lantern  beside  it. 

994.  Q.  What  care  does  this  require? 

A.  (a)  It  should  be  placed  in  the  company  street  at  dark 
and  be  removed  immediately  after  reveille. 


CAMP  SANITATION  AND  PERSONAL  HYGIENE  157 

(b)  It  should  be  emptied  in  the  "rear"  every  morning, 
scrubbed  and  burned  out  with  straw  and  oil  and  then 
the  bottom  covered  with  a  solution  of  lime  and  the  can 
kept  covered. 

995.  Q.  What  should  every  man  remember  about  the  disposal  of 

his  waste  matter? 
A.  (a)  That  the  bowels  and  bladder  should  not  be  emptied 
at  any  place  except  in  one  of  these  pits  and  then 
deposit  covered,  or  the  lid  of  the  box  seat  closed. 

(b)  Not  to  do  this  may  cause  sickness  for  himself  or  his 
comrades. 

(c)  If  the  material  is  not  placed  in  the  pits  and  properly 
covered,  some  of  it  will  always  find  its  way  to  the 
kitchen  either  by  flies  or  dust  and  he  will  be  get- 
ting it  served  with  his  meals. 

996.  Q.  In  a  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hour  camp  what  should 

be  done  with  the  garbage? 
A.  It  should  be  burned  in  the  cook  fire,  or  fire  for  that  pur- 
pose. 

997.  Q.  If  camp  is  to  be  longer  than  forty-eight  hours,  what 

should  be  done  with  it? 
A.  It  should  be  burned  in  the  company  incinerator. 

998.  Q.  How  would  you  build  a  company  incinerator? 

A.  (a)  Build  a  pit  three  feet  wide,  one  foot  deep  and  four 
and  a  half  feet  long,  near  the  kitchen. 

(b)  Fill  this  to  the  level  of  the  ground  with  loose  stones. 

(c)  Build  a  stone  wall  one  and  a  half  feet  high  around 
both  sides  and  one  end  of  pit. 

(d)  Bank  outside  of  stone  wall  with  dry  dirt. 

999.  Q.  How  should  the  garbage  be  placed  on  the  incinerator? 
A.  The  solid  garbage  should  be  burned  in  the  centre 

of  the  incinerator.  After  the  stones  become  hot 
the  liquid  should  be  poured  on  the  inside  of  the 
stone  wall  and  not  on  the  wood  or  fire. 

1000.  Q.  What  care  should  be  taken  in  using  the  incinerator? 
A.  (a)  Have  all  garbage  ip  the  incinerator  completely 

burned. 


158  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

(b)  Do  not  spill  garbage  on  the  ground  between 
kitchen  and  incinerator  or  on  the  dirt  surround- 
ing the  rock  wall. 

(c)  If  it  is  spilled  remove  it  at  once  and  rake  over 
the  surface  of  the  ground  where  it  fell. 

1001.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  all  dish  water  or  other 

greasy  water? 
A.  It  should  be  poured  in  the  incinerator  as  above. 

1002.  Q.  Why  not  throw  it  on  the  ground  and  allow  it  to  dry? 
A.  It  will  attract  flies  and  flies  will  collect  and  breed  in 

ground  soiled  with  this  kind  of  water. 

1003.  Q.  What  should  be  done  with  the  empty  cans? 

A.  They  should  be  burned  out  in  the  incinerator  and 
then  smashed  so  they  will  not  hold  water,  and  col- 
lected each  day  and  teken  to  the  dump  or  buried. 

1004.  Q.  What  can  every  man  do  to  help  prevent  flies  from 

collecting  in  a  camp? 
A.  (a)  Use  nothing  but  the  ''rears"  as  you  have  been 
told  before. 

(b)  See  that  every  particle  of  garbage  from  his  mess 
pan  goes  in  the  incinerator. 

(c)  See  that  greasy  water  from  washing  mess  pans 
goes  in  the  incinerator. 

(d)  See  that  all  pieces  of  fruit,  candy  or  anything 
that  attracts  flies  is  put  in  the  incinerator  and  not 
allowed  to  become  scattered  around  the  ground. 

1005.  Q.  If  water  for  the  camp  is  to  be  taken  from  a  running 

stream,  at  what  part  of  the  stream  would  you  get  it? 
A.  (a)  For  cooking  and  drinking  at  a  place  up  stream 
above  where  it  is  obtained  for  any  other  purpose. 

(b)  For  washing  clothing  at  a  place  down  stream 
below  where  it  is  obtained  for  any  other  purpose. 

(c)  For  bathing  below  the  place  where  cooking  and 
drinking  water  is  taken  and  above  where  clothing  is 
washed. 


CHAPTER  XII 
VENEREAL  DISEASE 

1006.  Q.  Why  are  venereal  diseases  so  important  in  the  army? 
A.  Because  they  cause  more  days  of  duty  to  be  lost  than 

any  other  disease.  In  1910  the  total  days  of  duty 
lost  were  the  same  as  if  one  whole  regiment  had 
been  absent  from  duty  during  the  entire  year,  be- 
sides losing  the  use  of  these  men  the  Government 
was  placed  at  great  expense  for  their  treatment. 

1007.  Q.  Why  are  these  diseases  so  important  to  every  soldier? 
A.  (a)  Because  they  are  diseases  that  he  can  avoid  and 

if  he  does  acquire  them  they  are  due  to  his  own  mis- 
conduct. 

(b)  Because  if  he  does  acquire  them  he  loses  his  pay 
during  the  days  absent  from  duty  and  also  has  to 
make  up  the  time  lost. 

(c)  Because  they  may  become  chronic  and  cause  his 
discharge  ''not  in  line  of  duty''  or  cause  him  to  re- 
quire treatment  for  years. 

1008.  A.  Are  venereal  diseases  as  common  among  civilians 

as  in  the  army? 
A.  (a)  Yes,  New  York  City  alone  had  a  quarter  of  a 
million  cases  in  1910. 

(b)  One  in  every  four  cases  of  blindness  are  due  to 
these  diseases. 

(c)  One  in  every  four  cases  of  insanity  are  due  ta 
these  diseases. 

(d)  One  in  every  ten  men  that  marry  give  their  wives 
Venereal  disease,  the  majority  of  them  believing 
they  have  been  cured. 

(e)  One  in  every  three  prostitutes  have  some  form 
of  venereal  disease  in  an  infectious  stage  and  eight 
out  of  every  ten  have  these  diseases  in  one  form  or 
another. 

15? 


160  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

1009.  Q.  What  laws  and  regulations  relative  to  venereal  dis- 

eases affect  soldiers? 

A.  (a)  Every  soldier  will  report  to  the  hospital  immedi- 
ately after  exposure  and  receive  the  prophylactic 
treatment.  For  failure  to  do  this  he  will  be  court 
martialed. 

(b)  He  will  receive  no  pay  for  the  days  lost  while 
absent  from  duty  on  account  of  venereal  disease. 

(c)  His  enlistment  period  will  not  be  completed  until 
he  has  made  up  the  days  lost  from  venereal  disease. 

(d)  If  he  is  discharged  for  disability  due  to  venereal 
disease  he  has  no  claim  for  a  pension. 

1010.  Q.  What  method  should  be  used  to  prevent  venereal 

disease? 

A.  (a)  Do  not  expose  yourself  to  these  diseases.  Tht: 
is  the  only  sure  method. 

(b)  If  you  have  not  sufficient  will  power  to  contro; 
your  passion  and  are  willing  to  take  the  chance 
of  catching  one  of  these  diseases,  immediately  afte'^ 
exposure  you  should  urinate  and  wash  parts  thor- 
oughly with  soap  and  water  and  then  report  to  the 
hospital  for  the  prophylactic. 

(c)  If  going  on  pass  or  furlough  for  more  than  twenty- 
four  hours,  buy  an  A  &  N  tube  at  Post  Exchange 
for  five  cents;  immediately  after  exposure  urinate 
and  wash  parts  thoroughly  with  soap  and  water 
and  use  medicine  in  this  tube  according  to  directions 
and  upon  arrival  at  the  post  report  immediately  to 
the  hospital. 

(d)  Avoid  the  use  of  alcohol  for  it  only  destroys  your 
will  power  and  will  cause  you  to  take  chances  that 
you  otherwise  would  not  take.  If  you  must  take 
an  occasional  glass  of  beer  go  to  a  place  that  is 
kept  clean  and  sanitary  and  has  no  back  rooms 
with  women  there  for  the  purpose  of  taking  your 
money. 

(e)  Avoid  the  company  of  women  whose  character  is 
questionable. 


VENEREAL  DISEASE  161 

1011.  Q.  What  should  you  remembor  if  you  expect  the  pro- 

phylactic to  be  of  any  benefit  to  you? 
A.  (a)  It  must  be  used  as  soon  as  possible  after  exposure 
and  immediately  after  arrival  in  the  post.  Re- 
member that  the  use  of  the  A  &  N  tube  does  not 
excuse  you  from  taking  the  treatment  at  the  hos- 
pital. 
(b)  The  longer  you  delay  using  it  the  greater  chance 
you  have  of  catching  disease. 

1012.  Q.  What  kinds  of  venereal  diseases  are  there? 

A.  Three:  1,  Syphilis;  2,  Gonorrhea;  3,  Chancroid. 

1013.  Q.  What  is  the  cause  of  syphilis? 

A.  It  is  caused  by  a  germ  getting  into  a  break  in  the 
skin,  usually  by  sexual  intercourse,  or  by  kissing 
a  person  with  a  syphilitic  sore  in  the  mouth,  also 
by  using  eating  utensils  or  drinking  cup  or  smok- 
ing a  pipe  or  cigarette  that  a  syphilitic  has  used, 
or  from  getting  the  discharge  from  a  syphilitic  sore 
into  a  break  in  the  skin;  sometimes  if  the  father 
or  mother  has  syphilis  the  child  will  be  bom  with 
the  disease. 

1014.  Q.  What  stages  does  the  disease  go  through? 
A.  (a)  Primary,  (first  stage). 

(b)  Secondary,  (second  stage). 

(c)  Tertiary,  (last  stage). 

1015.  Q.  What  is  the  primary  stage? 

A.  It  is  the  first  stage  of  the  disease  and  is  shown  by 
the  forming  of  a  hard,  raised  pimple  (the  chancre) 
from  the  top  of  which  comes  a  watery  discharge, 
at  the  place  the  germs  get  in  the  skin,  usually  around 
the  foreskin. 

1016.  Q.  What  is  the  secondary  stage? 

A.  It  comes  later  when  a  rash  appears  on  the  skin,  the 
throat  becomes  sore  or  there  are  sores  in  the  mouth 
and  the  hair  and  eyebrows  fall  out  and  the  eyes 
become  inflamed  and  painful  and  there  may  be  pain 
in  the  joints  and  bones. 


162  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

1017.  Q.  What  is  the  tertiary  stage? 

A.  It  may  come  on  within  eighteen  months  after  ex-, 
posure  or  it  may  not  develop  for  fifteen  or  twenty 
years,  when  there  may  be  deep  ulcers  of  the  skin, 
disease  of  the  bones  or  blood  vessels,  parts  of  the 
body  may  become  paralyzed  or  insanity  may  de- 
velop. 

1018.  Q.  In  what  stages  is  it  most  contagious? 
A.  In  the  first  and  second  stages. 

1019.  Q.  What  are  the  dangers  from  syphilis  if  it  is  not  prop- 

erly treated? 
A.  (a)  It  will  go  on  to  the  tertiary  stage  and  some  or  all 
of  the  above  things  develop. 

(b)  Between  the  different  stages  there  are  times 
when  a  man  will  feel  perfectly  well  and  think  he 
is  cured  and  he  then  neglects  treatment  only  to 
find  the  disease  again  appear  in  several  months 
or  years  afterwards. 

(c)  It  requires  such  thorough  treatment  for  such 
a  long  time  that  the  man  becomes  discouraged  and 
neglects  treatment. 

1020.  Q.  Why  should  you  go  on  sick  report  at  once  if  you 

find  you  have  such  a  sore  on  your  penis,  sore  throat 
or  sores  in  your  mouth  or  a  rash  on  your  skin? 
A.  Because  these  are  the  early  signs  of  the  disease  and 
the  sooner  the  treatment  is  started  the  sooner  you 
can  be  cured.  If  treatment  is  commenced  early 
and  properly  carried  out  sjrphilis  can  be  cured. 

1021.  Q.  What  is  the  cause  of  gonorrhea? 
A.  It  is  caused  by  a  germ. 

1022.  Q.  How  is  it  carried  from  one  person  to  another? 

A.  In  the  majority  of  cases  by  sexual  intercourse,  al- 
though it  may  be  carried  by  the  gonorrheal  pus 
getting  on  towels,  clothing,  hands,  or  by  sjrringes. 

1023.  Q.  How  would  you  know  if  you  had  contracted  gon- 

orrhea? 
^.  At  first  there  is  a  burning  or  itching  sensation  in  the 


VENEREAL  DISEASE  163 

penis  just  back  of  the  opening  in  the  end,  which  is 
made  worse  when  the  urine  is  passed  and  within 
twenty-four  hours  a  thick  yellow  discharge  comes 
from  the  penis. 

1024.  Q.  Why  should  you  go  on  sick  report  at  once  if  you  had 

any  of  these  signs? 

A.  Because  if  proper  treatment  is  started  at  once  it  can 
be  cured. 

1025.  Q.  What  are  some  of  the  things  that  may  result  from 

gonorrhea? 

A.  Strictures,  buboes  (''blue  balls,''  swelling  in  the  groin), 
swelling  of  the  testicle,  gonorrheal  rheumatism,  in- 
flammation of  the  bladder,  inflammation  of  the  ten- 
dons, ''blood  poisoning,''  heart  disease,  or  it  may  be- 
come chronic.     (Gleet). 

1026.  Q.  What  care  should  be  taken  about  the  discharge  from  the 

penis? 

A.  (a)  A  folded  cloth  or  home-made  bag  or  clean  to- 
bacco bag  with  cotton  in  it  should  cover  the  penis; 
all  of  which  should  be  burned  when  soiled. 

(b)  Wash  the  hands  with  soap  and  water  after  touching 
the  penis  or  dressing. 

(c)  If  any  of  the  pus  should  get  into  the  eye  the  disease 
develops  there  and  may  cause  you  to  lose  your 
sight. 

1027.  Q.  What  is  the  cause  of  chancroids? 
A.  They  are  caused  by  a  germ. 

1028.  Q.  How  is  it  carried  from  one  person  to  another? 

A.  Usually  by  sexual  intercourse,  or  by  the  pus  from  one  of 
these  sores  getting  into  a  break  in  the  skin. 

1029.  Q.  How  would  you  know  that  you  had  contracted  chan- 

croids? 

A.  There  first  appears  a  small  blister  usually  around  the 
foreskin,  which  breaks  and  leaves  a  raw  inflamed  spot 
which  later  increases  in  size  and  becomes  covered 
with  pus  and  near  this  ulcer  new  ones  form. 


164  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

1030.  Q.  Why  should  you  go  on  sick  report  at  once  if  you  had 

such  a  sore? 

A.  (a)  Because  it  will  keep  spreading  and  new  ones  form- 
ing unless  it  is  properly  treated, 
(b)  If  not  treated  early,  buboes  will  form  which  often 
form  abscesses  that  have  to  be  opened  and  they 
take  weeks  or  months  to  heal. 

1031.  Q.  If  you  had  reason  to  believe  you  were  developing  any 

kind  of  venereal  disease,  what  should  you  do  at  once, 
and  why? 

A.  (a)  Report  to  a  medical  officer  at  once. 

(b)  If  treatment  is  started  at  once  the  number  of  days' 
time  and  pay  you  lose  will  be  lessened. 

(c)  The  disease  will  be  discovered  at  the  semi-monthly 
inspection  and  you  then  will  have  to  take  treatment. 

(d)  To  attempt  to  treat  yourself  or  be  treated  with 
patent  medicines  or  by  drug  clerks  or  quacks  only 
delays  your  cure  and  may  result  in  some  dis- 
ability that  may  cause  your  discharge. 

(e)  You  will  get  the  best  treatment  possible,  and  the 
Government  pays  for  it. 


CHAPTER  XIII 
GUARD  MANUAL 

1032.  Q.  What  are  the  points  considered  in  selecting  an  orderly? 
A.  (a)  A  soldier  will  be  selected  who  is  the  most  correct  in 

the  performance  of  duty. 

(b)  The  best  in  military  bearing. 

(c)  The  neatest  in  personal  appearance  and  clothing. 

(d)  Whose  arms  and  accoutrements  are  in  the  best  con- 
dition. 

1033.  Q.  What  does  the  orderly  do  when  he  is  ordered  to  fall  out 

at  guard  mount? 

A.  (a)  He  will  give  his  name,  company  and  regiment  to  the 
Sergeant  of  the  Guard, 
(b)  Take  his  rifle  to  his  company  quarters  and  go  at 
once  to  the  officer  to  whom  he  is  assigned. 

1034.  Q.  How  does  he  report? 

A.  ''Sir,  Private  Smith,  Company  'Q,'  reports  as  orderly." 

1035.  Q.  What  should  an  orderly  look  out  for  when  he  is  ordered 

to  carry  a  message? 

A.  He  should  take  care  to  deliver  the  message  exactly  as  it 
was  given  him. 

1036.  Q.  When  does  his  tour  of  duty  end? 

A.  When  he  is  relieved  by  the  next  orderly. 

1037.  Q.  Are  color  sentinels  placed  on  regular  posts? 
A.  No,  sir. 

1038.  Q.  Are  their  posts  numbered? 
A.  No,  sir. 

1039.  Q.  How  does  a  sentinel  on  the  color  line  call  the  Corporal 

of  the  Guard? 
A.  ''Corporal  of  the  Guard,  Color  Line." 
L040.  Q.  Will  officers  and  enlist^  men  passing  the  uncased 
colors,  salute? 

165 


166  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Yes. 

1041.  Q.  When  do  they  salute? 

A.  On  crossing  the  color  line  or  passing  the  colors. 

1042.  Q.  Will  a  sentinel  placed  over  the  colors  permit  them  to  be 

moved? 
A.  No,  except  in  the  presence  of  an  armed  escort. 

1043.  Q.  Who  is  allowed  to  touch  the  colors? 

A.  The  color  bearer  only,  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the 
commanding  officer. 

1044.  Q.  Will  he  permit  any  soldier  to  take  arms  from  the  stacks? 
A.  No,  except  by  order  of  an  officer  or  a  non-commissioned 

officer  of  the  guard. 

1045.  Q.  If  any  person  passes  the  colors  or  crosses  the  color  line 

and  fails  to  salute  the  colors,  what  will  the  sentinel 
do? 
A.  The  sentinel  will  caution  him  to  do  so  and  if  the  caution 
is  not  heeded  he  will  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and 
report  the  facts. 

Privates  op  the  Guard 

1046.  Q.  What  two  kinds  of  orders  has  a  sentinel  on  post? 
A.  General  and  special. 

1047.  Q.  What  are  your  general  orders? 
A.  My  General  orders  are: 

1.  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  government  property 
in  view. 

2.  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping  always 
on  the  alert  and  observing  everything  that  takes  place 
within  sight  or  hearing. 

3.  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  I  am  instmcted  to 
enforce. 

4.  To  repeat  all  calls  from  posts  more  distant  from  the 
guard-house  than  my  own. 

5.  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

6.  To  receive,  obey,  and  pass  on  to  the  sentinel  who  re- 
lieves  me  all  orders  from  the  commanding  officer,  officer 


GUARD  MANUAL  167 

of  the  day,  and  officers  and  nonrcommissioned  officers 
of  the  guard  only. 

7.  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty. 

8.  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

9.  To  allow  no  one  to  commit  a  nuisance  on  or  near  my 
post. 

10.  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call  the 
corporal  of  the  guard. 

11.  To  salute  all  officers',  and  all  colors  and  standards 
not  cased. 

12.  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night,  and  during  the 
time  for  challeng  ng,  to  challenge  all  persons  on  or 
near  my  post,  and  allow  no  one  to  pass  without  proper 
authority. 

1048.  Q.  In  your  general  orders  what  is  the  meaning  of  the 

word  (a)  "alert"?  (b)  "violations"? 
A.  (a)  Watchful  and  wide-awake  (b)  breaking. 

1049.  Q.  What  are  colors? 

A.  National  and  Regimental  flags  carried  by  foot  troops. 
The  National  color  is  red,  white  and  blue.  The 
Regimental  color  is  blue  for  Infantry  and  scarlet 
for  Coast  Artillery. 

1050.  Q.  What  are  standards? 

A.  National  and  Regimental  flags  carried  by  mounted 

troops. 
The  National  standard  is  red*,  white  and  blue. 
The  Regimental  standard  is  yellow  for  Cavalry  and 

scarlet  for  Field  Artillery. 

1051.  Q.  What  is  the  meaning  of  the  term  "cased"? 

A.  When  colors  or  standards  are  folded  around  their 
staffs  and  a  waterproof  case  drawn  over  them  they 
are  said  to  be  "cased." 

1052.  Q.  Are  all  persons  of  whatever  rank  required  to  observe 

respect  toward  sentinels  and  members  of  the  guard? 
A.  Yes,  when  they  are  in  performance  of  their  duties. 

1053.  Q.  What  should  a  sentry  do  in  cage  anything  suspicious 

Qr  uiiusu^l  happens? 


168  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

A.  Report  it  at  once  to  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

1054.  Q.  What  will  he  do  to  all  suspicious  persons  prowling 

around  his  post? 
To  parties  creating  a  disorder  near  his  post? 
To  persons  who  attempt  to  enter  the  camp  at  night? 
A.  Arrest  them  and  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard. 

1055.  Q.  Are  the  number,  limits,  and  extent  of  your  post  part 

of  your  General  or  Special  Orders? 
A.  Special  Orders. 

1056.  Q.  The  limits  of  your  post  include  what? 

A.  Every  place  I  am  required  to  go  in  the  performance 
of  my  duty. 

1057.  Q.  How  does  the  sentry  carry  his  rifle  when  on  post? 

A.  He  may  carry  it  either  at  the  right  or  left  shoulder, 
and  in  wet  weather  at  the  secure. 

1058.  Q.  Except  in  case  of  relief,  fire,  or  disorder,  how  does  the 

sentry  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard? 

A.  ''Corporal  of  the  guard.  No " 

1059.  Q.  How  does  he  call  for  relief  in  case  of  sickness? 

A.  ''Corporal  of  the  guard.  No ,  Relief." 

1060.  Q.  What  does  a  sentry  do  when  he  is  to  be  relieved? 

A.  (a)  He  will  halt,  face  toward  the  relief  at  a  right 
shoulder  when  it  is  30  paces  from  him. 

(b)  Come  to  a  port  arms  with  the  new  sentry. 

Turn  over  to  him  all  the  special  orders  relating  to 
his  post. 

1061.  Q.  Has  any  officer  the  authority  to  investigate  the  ap- 

parent violation  of  regulations  by  members  of  the 
guard? 

A.  He  has. 

1062.  Q.  When  halting  or  holding  communication,  in  what 

position  does  the  sentry  hold  his  piece? 

A.  Port  arms,  except  at  night  when  a  person  approaches 
dangerously  near,  when  he  will  hold  his  piece  in  the 
position  of  guard. 


GUARD  MANUAL  169 

1063.  Q.  How  does  the  sentry  give  the  alann  in  case  of  fire? 
A.  'Tire,  No " 

1064.  Q.  Should  the  sentry  put  out  the  fire  himself? 
A.  Yes,  if  not  too  great. 

1065.  Q.  Will  he  discharge  his  piece? 
A.  Yes,  if  the  danger  is  great. 

1066.  Q.  How  does  the  sentry  give  the  alarm  in  case  of  disorder? 
A.  By  calling:  ''The  Guard,  No " 

1067.  Q.  Will  he  discharge  his  piece? 
A.  Yes,  if  the  danger  is  great. 

1068.  Q.  If  not  engaged  in  the  performance  of  duty  which 

would  prevent  it,  does  a  sentry  salute  all  officers 
who  pass? 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

1069.  Q.  How  does  a  sentry  salute? 

A.  If  armed  and  on  post,  he  halts,  piece  at  right  shoul- 
der, faces  toward  the  person  to  be  saluted,  when  he 
comes  within  30  paces  and  comes  to  a  present  arms 
when  the  person  saluted  is  at  the  saluting  distance. 
At  all  other  times,  he  will  salute  with  the  right  hand. 

1070.  Q.  If  armed  and  not  on  post  how  does  he  salute? 
A.  With  the  rifle  salute. 

1071.  Q.  In  case  of  the  approach  of  an  armed  party  of  the 

guard,  the  sentinel  will  do  what? 
A.  He  will  halt  when  the  party  is  about  30  paces  from 
him  with  his  piece  at  the  right  shoulder,  facing 
toward  the  party. 

1072.  Q.  If  he  is  not  himself  relieved  at  this  time  what  will  he  do? 
A.  He  will  so  place  himself  that  the  party  passes  in  front 

of  him. 

1073.  Q.  When  does  he  resume  walking  his  post? 

A.  When  the  party  has  reached  6  paces  beyond  him, 

1074.  Q.  At  what  distance  does  a  sentry  salute? 

A.  When  the  party  is  at  6  paces  or  at  the  nearest  point 
to  hinPL 


170  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

1075.  Q.  During  challenging  hours  when  does  the  sentry  salute 

an  officer? 

A.  When  duly  recognized  and  advanced,  and  again  after- 
wards if  conversation  takes  place. 

1076.  Q.  Is  an  officer  entitled  to  a  compliment  when  either  in  or 

out  of  uniform? 
A.  He  is. 

1077.  Q.  Will  a  sentry  in  conversation  with  an  officer  interrupt 

the  conversation  to  salute  other  officers? 
A.  No,  sir,  unless  the  officer  to  whom  he  is  talking  salutes. 

1078.  Q.  What  does  a  sentry  on  post  do  in  case  he  is  in  sight  of 

the  flag  when  it  is  being  lowered  at  retreat? 
A.  He  faces  the  flag  and  stands  at  present  arms  during  the 
sounding  of  ''  To  the  Colors,"  or  ''  The  Star  Spangled 
Banner." 

1079.  Q.  What  does  a  sentry  do  when  he  challenges? 

A.  He  advances  rapidly  toward  the  person  or  party 
challenged,  when  within  30  paces  of  them  will  call: 
*'Halt,  who  is  there?"  and  place  himself  in  the  best 
position  to  receive  or  arrest  the  party. 

1080.  Q.  What  does  the  sentry  do  in  case  the  party  challenged  is 

mounted? 
A.  He  calls:  "Halt,  dismount,  who  is  there?" 

1081.  Q.  What  does  the  sentry  do  in  case  the  challenged  party 

consists  of  more  than  one  person? 
A.  He  calls:  "Halt,  who  is  there?  Advance  one  to  be 
recognized,"  and  if  recognized,  he  commands,  "Ad- 
vance relief"  or  Advance  patrol,"  as  the  case  may  be. 

1082.  Q.  What  does  a  sentry  do  in  case  several  parties  approach 

his  post  from  several  directions  at  the  same  time? 

A.  All  are  halted  in  turn  and  the  senior  advanced. 

1083.  Q.  If  a  sentry  is  in  conversation  with  a  party  and  other 

persons  approach  his  post,  what  does  he  do? 

A.  Halt  them  in  turn  and  continues  his  conversation,  im- 
less  they  are  senior  to  the  person  to  whom  he  is  talk- 
ing, in  which  case  he  advances  them  at  once. 


GUARD  MANUAL  171 

1084.  Q.  In  what  order  do  the  commanding  officer  and  officials  of 

the  guard  and  others  come  or  rank? 
A.  Commanding  Officer,  Officer  of  the  Day,  Officers  of  the 
Guard,  Officers,  Patrols,  Reliefs,  Non-commissioned 
Officers  of  the  Guard  in  order  of  rank  and  friends. 

Special  Orders  for  Sentinels  at  Guard  House 

1085.  Q.  What  orders  are  the  sentries  at  the  guard-house  re- 

quired to  memorize? 
A.  (a)  Between  reveille  and  retreat  to  turn  out  the  guard  for 
all  persons  designated  by  the  Commanding  Officer, 
for  all  colors  or  standards  not  cased,  and  in  time  of 
war  for  all  armed  parties  approaching  my  post,  ex- 
cept troops  at  drill  and  relief  and  detachments  of  the 
guard. 
(6)  At  night,  after  challenging  any  person  or  party,  to  ad- 
vance no  one  hut  call  the  corporal  of  the  guard,  re- 
peating the  answer  to  the  challenge, 

(c)  The  sentinel  at  the  post  of  the  guard  has  charge  of  the 

prisoners  except  when  they  have  been  turned  over  to 
the  prison  guard  or  overseers. 

(d)  He  will  allow  none  to  escape. 

(e)  He  will  allow  none  to  cross  his  post  leaving  the  guard- 

house except  when  passed  by  an  officer  or  non-com- 
missioned officer  of  the  guard. 

(/)  He  will  allow  no  one  to  communicate  with  prisoners 
without  permission  from  proper  authority. 

(g)  He  will  promptly  report  to  the  corporal  of  the  gvxird 
any  suspicious  noise  made  by  the  prisoners. 

Qi)  He  will  be  prepared  to  tell  whenever  asked,  how  many 
prisoners  are  in  the  guard-house  and  how  many  are 
out  at  work  elsewhere. 

(i)  Whenever  prisoners  are  brought  to  his  post  returning 
from  work  or  elsewhere,  he  will  halt  them  and  call 
the  corporal  of  the  guard,  notify  him  of  the  number 
of  prisoners  returning.  Thus  ''Corporal  of  the 
guard,  so  many  prisoners.'^ 

(j)  He  will  not  allow  prisoners  to  pass  into  the  guardr 


172  THE  SOLDIER'S  CATECHISM 

house  until  the  corporal  of  the  guard  has  responded 
to  the  call  and  ordered  him  to  do  so. 

1086.  Q.  After  receiving  an  answer  to  his  challenge,  the  sentry 

at  the  guard-house  does  what? 
A.  Calls:   ''Corporal  of  the  guard,  so  and  so,''  repeating 
the  answer  to  the  challenge. 

1087.  Q.  How  long  does  he  remain  in  the  challenging  position? 
A.  Until  the  corporal  has  recognized  or  advanced  the  per- 
son challenged. 

1088.  Q.  Does  the  sentry  salute  the  person  or  party  challenged? 
A.  Yes,  if  that  person  is  entitled  to  a  salute. 

1089.  Q.  When  does  he  resume  walking  his  post? 

A.  As  soon  as  the  person  has  been  recognized,  advanced  or 
saluted. 

1090.  Q.  What  does  the  sentry  do  at  the  approach  of  the  new 

guard  at  guard  mounting? 
A.  He  calls:  "Turn  out  the  guard,  armed  party." 

1091.  Q.  If  the  person  named  by  the  sentinel  does  not  desire  the 

guard  formed  he  will  salute.    What  does  the  sentinel 
do? 
A.  He  will  call:  "Never  mind  the  guard." 

1092.  Q.  After  calling:    "Turn  out  the  guard,"  does  a  sentinel 

call:  "Never  mind  the  guard,"  on  the  approach  of  an 
armed  party? 
A.  No,  sir. 

1093.  Q.  In  case  the  guard  is  already  formed,  does  he  still  turn  it 

out  for  the  person  entitled  to  the  compliment? 

A.  Yes,  sir. 

1094.  Q.  What  will  a  sentinel  at  the  guard  house  do  in  case  of  fire 

or  disorder  in  sight  or  hearing? 

A.  Call  the  corporal  of  the  guard  and  report  the  facts  to  him. 

1095.  Q.  What  is  a  countersign? 

A.  A  word  used  as  an  aid  to  guards  and  sentinels  in 
identifying  persons  who  are  authorized  to  pass  at 
night.    It  is  usually  the  name  of  some  battle. 


GUARD  MANUAL  173 

1096.  Q.  What  is  a  parole? 

A.  A  word  used  as  a  check  on  the  countersign  and  given 
only  to  those  entitled  to  inspect  the  guard.  It  is 
usually  the  name  of  some  general. 

1097.  Q.  Are  countersigns  and  paroles  much  used? 
A.  They  are  not. 

1098.  Q.  What  should  a  sentry  do  if  a  prisoner  attempts  to 

escape? 
A.  He  should  immediately  prepare  his  rifle  for  firing  and 
call  "Halt.''  If  the  prisoner  fails  to  halt  he  should 
again  call "  Halt,"  and  if  he  fails  to  halt  this  time  (and 
the  sentry  sees  no  other  way  of  stopping  him)  the 
sentry  will  fire  upon  him. 


Index 


PACK 


Absences .  75 

Ammunition 14 

Articles  of  War 82 

Bayonet  Combat 89 

Bearers,  Flags  of  Truce 56 

Care  of  Feet 143 

Care  of  Leather  Equipment        23 

Care  of  the  Health 148 

In  Camp 154 

In  Garrison         148 

On  the  March 152 

Care  of  the  Teeth 150 

Cause  of  Poor  Scores 119 

Ceremonies  and  Inspections 57 

Challenging 170 

Cleaning  Rifle 11 

Clothing 73 

Clothing  and  Shoes 24 

Combat  Signals 64 

Company  Flags \ 35 

Company  Fund 74 

Deflection  and  Elevation 113 

Deserters 56 

Desertion .  76 

Designation  of  Enemy 67 

Designation  of  Targets 123 

Discharges 75 

Discipline 73,85 

Disposal  of  Garbage 157 

Distribution  of  Fire 123 

Don'ts  for  Shooting 108 

Duties  Outpost  Sentinels 56 

Escape  of  Prisoners 173 

Estimating  Distance 115 

Field  Kit 3 

Finances 79 

Firing  Regulations  and  Definitions 102 

First  Aid  Packet,  Use  of 131 

175 


176  INDEX 

PAOB 

First  Aid  in  Drowning      .     •     .     , 136 

First  Aid  in  Fainting 142 

First  Aid  in  Fractures 134 

First  Aid  in  Freezing 141 

First  Aid  in  Heat  Exhaustion 142 

First  Aid  in  Heat  Stroke 142 

First  Aid  in  Poisoning 143 

First  Aid  in  Snake  Bite 140 

First  Aid  in  Sprains 134 

First  Aid  to  Burns 141 

First  Aid  to  Wounds         128 

Flies 146 

Breeding  Places  of        146 

Feeding  Places  of 146 

Prevention  of 147 

Flinching 119 

Gallery  Practice 114 

General  Orders 166 

General  Rules  for  Drills  and  Formations    . 30 

General  Service  Code 60 

Hemorrhage 128 

Incinerators 157 

Infantry  Against  Cavalry 43 

Infantry  Drill,  Definitions 27 

Infantry  Equipment,  Model  1910 19 

Infected  Wounds,  Prevention  of 16 

Intrenching  Tools 16 

Latrines 155 

Lice,  Diseases  Caused  by 149 

Loadings  and  Firings .  40 

Manual  of  Arms 37 

Marching 50 

Medal  of  Honor 77 

Messages 47 

National  Air 87 

Night  Operations 42 

Oiler  and  Thong  Case 10 

Orderlies  and  Color  Sentinels 165 

Orders,  Commands  and  Signals        31 

Outposts 53 

Parts  of  Rifle 5 

Parts  of  the  Bayonet 13, 14 

Passes  and  Furloughs 76 

Patrolling 43 

Pistol  Firing 119 

Position  and  Aiming  Drills Ill 


INDEX  177 


PAGE 


Position  of  "Attention" 35 

Post  Exchanges 78 

Preliminary  Drills,  Target  Practice 102 

Protection  on  the  March 61 

Punishment 81 

Range  of  Rifle 12 

Rapid  Fire 113, 117 

Regulations 73 

Retirement 77 

Rosters 78 

Rules  of  Land  Warfare 67 

Saluting 85 

School  of  the  Squad 38 

Shooting  on  the  Range 115 

Sick 79 

Sighting  Instruction 109 

Signaling 59 

Special  Orders  of  Sentinels  at  Guard  House 171 

Steps  and  Marching 36 

Surplus  Kit 3 

Tent  Pitching ^  57 

The  Tourniquet 129 

Trenches 16 

Two  Arm  Semaphore 62 

U.S.  History 94 

Use  of  Cover 14, 41 

Use  of  Intrenching  Tools 16 

Use  of  Sling 113 

Venereal  Disease 159 

Chancroids 161 

Gonorrhea 161 

Syphilis 161 

Weight  and  Length  of  Rifle        12 

Windage 105 


Ve  40299 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  LIBRARY 


